Communication device

ABSTRACT

The communication device comprising the voice communicating implementer, the sound caller ID implementer, the auto time adjusting implementer, the calculation implementer, the word processing implementer, the stereo audio data output implementer, the digital camera implementer, the multiple language displaying implementer, the caller&#39;s information displaying implementer, the icon software implementer, the voice recognition implementer, the email implementer, the video phone implementer, the navigation implementer, the audiovisual playback implementer, and the simultaneous implementer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/854,892 filed2010 Aug. 12, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,041,371, which is a continuation ofU.S. Ser. No. 11/688,913 filed 2007 Mar. 21, now U.S. Pat. No.7,856,248, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/710,600 filed2004 Jul. 23, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, which claims the benefit ofU.S. Provisional Application No. 60/481,426 filed 2003 Sep. 26, all ofwhich are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U.S. Patent Publication No. 20030013483 is introduced as prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: “A userinterface includes a main screen segregated into various screen areas.At least one of the screen areas is devoted to a system application fordisplaying status icons, and another of the screen areas is devoted toan interface page which may or may not link to other interface pageswhich are used for displaying current or recent application informationfor respective user applications, which user applications may beaccessed through interaction with the interface page. The applicationinformation may be application status information, recent communicationmessages (such as e-mail messages, SMS messages, or instant messagingmessages) and/or one or more upcoming events or to do items for a user.The user interaction may occur through selection with a pointing devicesuch as a stylus, a fingertip stylus, a finger, or one or more buttons,or even through voice commands. The user interface may also include anarea reserved for displaying advertisements.” However, this prior artdoes not disclose the communication device comprising the voicecommunicating implementer, the sound caller ID implementer, the autotime adjusting implementer, the calculation implementer, the wordprocessing implementer, the stereo audio data output implementer, thedigital camera implementer, the multiple language displayingimplementer, the caller's information displaying implementer, the iconsoftware implementer, the voice recognition implementer, the emailimplementer, the video phone implementer, the navigation implementer,the audiovisual playback implementer, and the simultaneous implementer.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

The present invention introduces the communication device which includesthe communication device comprising the voice communicating implementer,the sound caller ID implementer, the auto time adjusting implementer,the calculation implementer, the word processing implementer, the stereoaudio data output implementer, the digital camera implementer, themultiple language displaying implementer, the caller's informationdisplaying implementer, the icon software implementer, the voicerecognition implementer, the email implementer, the video phoneimplementer, the navigation implementer, the audiovisual playbackimplementer, and the simultaneous implementer.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following description is of the best presently contemplated mode ofcarrying out the present invention. This description is not to be takenin a limiting sense but is made merely for the purpose of describing thegeneral principles of the invention. For example, each description ofrandom access memory in this specification illustrate(s) only onefunction or mode in order to avoid complexity in its explanation,however, such description does not mean that only one function or modecan be implemented at a time. In other words, more than one function ormode can be implemented simultaneously by way of utilizing the samerandom access memory. In addition, the figure number is cited after theelements in parenthesis in a manner for example ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. Itis done so merely to assist the readers to have a better understandingof this specification, and must not be used to limit the scope of theclaims in any manner since the figure numbers cited are not exclusive.There are only few data stored in each storage area described in thisspecification. This is done so merely to simplify the explanation and,thereby, to enable the reader of this specification to understand thecontent of each function with less confusion. Therefore, more than fewdata (hundreds and thousands of data, if necessary) of the same kind,not to mention, are preferred to be stored in each storage area to fullyimplement each function described herein. The scope of the inventionshould be determined by referencing the appended claims.

FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of the Communication Device 200utilized in the present invention. Referring to FIG. 1, CommunicationDevice 200 includes CPU 211 which controls and administers the overallfunction and operation of Communication Device 200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206to temporarily store data and/or to perform calculation to perform itsfunction, and to implement the present invention, modes, functions, andsystems explained hereinafter. Video Processor 202 generates analogand/or digital video signals which are displayed on LCD 201. ROM 207stores the data and programs which are essential to operateCommunication Device 200. Wireless signals are received by Antenna 218and processed by Signal Processor 208. Input signals are input by InputDevice 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick, and/or a keypad, and thesignals are transferred via Input Interface 209 and Data Bus 203 to CPU211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which is designed to output differentcolors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc). Analog audio data is input toMicrophone 215. A/D 213 converts the analog audio data into a digitalformat. Speaker 216 outputs analog audio data which is converted into ananalog format from digital format by D/A 204. Sound Processor 205produces digital audio signals that are transferred to D/A 204 and alsoprocesses the digital audio signals transferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit214 captures video image which is stored in RAM 206 in a digital format.Vibrator 217 vibrates the entire device by the command from CPU 211.

As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/Video Processor 202 may beseparated from the other elements described in FIG. 1, and be connectedin a wireless fashion to be wearable and/or head-mountable.

When Communication Device 200 is in the voice communication mode, theanalog audio data input to Microphone 215 is converted to a digitalformat by A/D 213 and transmitted to another device via Antenna 218 in awireless fashion after being processed by Signal Processor 208, and thewireless signal representing audio data which is received via Antenna218 is output from Speaker 216 after being processed by Signal Processor208 and converted to analog signal by D/A 204. For the avoidance ofdoubt, the definition of Communication Device 200 in this specificationincludes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition of Communication Device 200also includes in this specification any device which is mobile and/orportable and which is capable to send and/or receive audio data, textdata, image data, video data, and/or other types of data in a wirelessfashion via Antenna 218. The definition of Communication Device 200further includes any micro device embedded or installed into devices andequipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder, heater, air conditioner, fan,clock, micro wave oven, dish washer, refrigerator, oven, washingmachine, dryer, door, window, automobile, motorcycle, and modem) toremotely control these devices and equipments. The size of CommunicationDevice 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device 200 may be installed inhouses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships, submarines, airplanes, andspaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the elements of Communication Device 200.The elements of Communication Device 200 described in this paragraph isidentical to the ones described in FIG. 1, except Communication Device200 has new element, i.e., LED 219. Here, LED 219 receives infra redsignals from other wireless devices, which are transferred to CPU 211via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sends infra red signals in a wirelessfashion which are composed by CPU 211 and transferred via Data Bus 203.As the second embodiment, LED 219 may be connected to Signal Processor208. Here, LED 219 transfers the received infra red signals to SignalProcessor 208, and Signal Processor 208 processes and converts thesignals to a CPU readable format which are transferred to CPU 211 viaData Bus 203. The data produced by CPU 211 are processed by SignalProcessor 208 and transferred to another device via LED 219 in awireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as same as that of Antenna 218described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizes infra red signals forimplementing wireless communication in the second embodiment. For theavoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g., referring to FIG. 1in parenthesis) automatically refers to this paragraph in thisspecification.

This paragraph illustrate(s) the data stored in Host H. In the presentembodiment, Host H includes Host Information Storage Area H00 a whichstores various types of data to assist and/or co-operate withCommunication Device 200 to implement all modes, functions, and systemsdescribed in this specification. As another embodiment, Host H may becomposed of a plurality of computers, i.e., one master computer and aplurality of slave computers, wherein the master computer is connectedto the plurality of slave computers. As another embodiment, Host H mayalso be composed of a plurality of master computers by way of utilizingpeer-to-peer connection.

<<Voice Recognition System>>

Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1) has the function to operate the deviceby the user's voice or convert the user's voice into a text format(i.e., the voice recognition). The voice recognition function can beperformed in terms of software by using Area 261, the voice recognitionworking area, of RAM 206 (FIG. 1) which is specifically allocated toperform such function, or can also be performed in terms of hardwarecircuit where such space is specifically allocated in Area 282 of SoundProcessor 205 (FIG. 1) for the voice recognition system.

This paragraph illustrates how the voice recognition function isactivated. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks the input status ofInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S1). If CPU 211 detects a specific signalinput from Input Device 210 (S2) the voice recognition system isactivated. As another embodiment, the voice recognition system can alsobe activated by entering predetermined phrase, such as ‘start voicerecognition system’ via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1).

<<Voice Recognition—Dialing/Auto-Off During Call Function>>

This paragraph illustrates the operation of the voice recognition in thepresent invention. Once the voice recognition system is activated (S1)the analog audio data is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S2). Theanalog audio data is converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1)(S3). The digital audio data is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) to retrieve the text and numeric information therefrom (S4).Then the numeric information is retrieved (S5) and displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S6). If the retrieved numeric information is not correct (S7),the user can input the correct numeric information manually by usingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S8). Once the sequence of inputting thenumeric information is completed and after the confirmation process isover (S9), the entire numeric information is displayed on LCD 201 andthe sound is output from Speaker 216 under control of CPU 211 (S10). Ifthe numeric information is correct (S11), Communication Device 200(FIG. 1) initiates the dialing process by utilizing the numericinformation (S12). The dialing process continues until CommunicationDevice 200 is connected to another device (S13). Once CPU 211 detectsthat the line is connected it automatically deactivates the voicerecognition system (S14).

CPU 211 (FIG. 1) checks the status of Communication Device 200periodically (S1) and remains the voice recognition system offlineduring call (S2). If the connection is severed, i.e., user hangs up,then CPU 211 reactivates the voice recognition system (S3).

<<Voice Recognition Tag Function>>

The following paragraphs describe the method of inputting the numericinformation in a convenient manner.

In this embodiment , RAM 206 includes Table #1 and Table #2. Audioinformation #1 corresponds to tag ‘Scott.’ Namely audio information,such as wave data, which represents the sound of ‘Scott’ (sounds like‘S-ko-t’) is registered in Table #1, which corresponds to tag ‘Scott’.In the same manner audio information #2 corresponds to tag ‘Carol’;audio information #3 corresponds to tag ‘Peter’; audio information #4corresponds to tag ‘Amy’; and audio information #5 corresponds to tag‘Brian.’ Tag ‘Scott’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(916)411-2526’; tag ‘Carol’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(418)675-6566’; tag ‘Peter’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(220)890-1567’; tag ‘Amy’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(615)125-3411’; and tag ‘Brian’ corresponds to numeric information ‘(042)645-2097.’ Once the audio data is processed as described in S4hereinbefore, CPU 211 scans Table #1 (S1). If the retrieved audio datamatches with one of the audio information registered in Table #1 (S2),CPU 211 scans Table #2 (S3) and retrieves the corresponding numericinformation from Table #2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the present invention.Here, RAM 206 includes Table #A instead of Table #1 and Table #2described above. In this embodiment, audio info #1 (i.e., wave datawhich represents the sound of ‘Scot’) directly corresponds to numericinformation ‘(916) 411-2526.’ In the same manner audio info #2corresponds to numeric information ‘(410) 675-6566’; audio info #3corresponds to numeric information ‘(220) 890-1567’; audio info #4corresponds to numeric information ‘(615) 125-3411’; and audio info #5corresponds to numeric information ‘(042) 645-2097.’ Once the audio datais processed as described in S4 hereinbefore, CPU 211 scans Table #A(S1). If the retrieved audio data matches with one of the audioinformation registered in Table #A (S2), it retrieves the correspondingnumeric information therefrom (S3).

As another embodiment, RAM 206 may contain only Table #2 and tag can beretrieved from the voice recognition system explained hereinbefore.Namely, once the audio data is processed by CPU 211 (FIG. 1) asdescribed in S4 hereinbefore and retrieves the text data therefrom anddetects one of the tags registered in Table #2 (e.g., ‘Scot’), CPU 211retrieves the corresponding numeric information (e.g., ‘(916) 411-2526’)from the same table.

<<Voice Recognition Noise Filtering Function>>

The following paragraphs describe the method of minimizing the undesiredeffect of the background noise when utilizing the voice recognitionsystem.

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 255 and Area 256.Sound audio data which represents background noise is stored in Area255, and sound audio data which represents the beep, ringing sound andother sounds which are emitted from the Communication Device 200 arestored in Area 256.

This paragraph describes the method to utilize the data stored in Area255 and Area 256 described hereinbefore. When the voice recognitionsystem is activated as described hereinbefore, the analog audio data isinput from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). The analog audio data isconverted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audiodata is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3) and compared tothe data stored in Area 255 and Area 256 (S4). Such comparison can bedone by either Sound Processor 205 or CPU 211 (FIG. 1). If the digitalaudio data matches to the data stored in Area 255 and/or Area 256, thefiltering process is initiated and the matched portion of the digitalaudio data is deleted as background noise. Such sequence of process isdone before retrieving text and numeric information from the digitalaudio data.

This paragraph describes the method of updating Area 255. When the voicerecognition system is activated as described hereinbefore, the analogaudio data is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1). The analog audiodata is converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). Thedigital audio data is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) or CPU211 (FIG. 1) (S3) and the background noise is captured (S4). CPU 211(FIG. 1) scans Area 255 and if the captured background noise is notregistered in Area 255, it updates the sound audio data stored therein(S5).

This paragraph describes another embodiment of the present invention.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) routinely checks whether the voice recognition systemis activated (S1). If the system is activated (S2), the beep, ringingsound, and other sounds which are emitted from Communication Device 200are automatically turned off in order to minimize the miss recognitionprocess of the voice recognition system (S3).

<<Voice Recognition Auto-Off Function>>

The voice recognition system can be automatically turned off to avoidglitch. When the voice recognition system is activated (S1), CPU 211(FIG. 1) automatically sets a timer (S2). The value of timer (i.e., thelength of time until the system is deactivated) can be set manually bythe user. The timer is incremented periodically (S3), and if theincremented time equals to the predetermined value of time as set in S2(S4), the voice recognition system is automatically deactivated (S5).

<<Voice Recognition Email Function (1)>>

This paragraph illustrates the first embodiment of the function oftyping and sending e-mails by utilizing the voice recognition system.Once the voice recognition system is activated (S1), the analog audiodata is input from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S2). The analog audio datais converted into digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S3). The digitalaudio data is processed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) or CPU 211(FIG. 1) to retrieve the text and numeric information therefrom (S4).The text and numeric information are retrieved (S5) and are displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S6). If the retrieved information is not correct (S7),the user can input the correct text and/or numeric information manuallyby using the Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) (S8). If inputting the text andnumeric information is completed (S9) and CPU 211 detects input signalfrom Input Device 210 to send the e-mail (S10), the dialing process isinitiated (S11). The dialing process is repeated until CommunicationDevice 200 is connected to Host H (S12), and the e-mail is sent to thedesignated address (S13).

<<Voice Recognition—Speech-to-Text Function>>

The next paragraph illustrates the speech-to-text function ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Once Communication Device 200 receives a transmitted data from anotherdevice via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1), Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1)processes the data (e.g., wireless signal error check and decompression)(S2), and the transmitted data is converted into digital audio data(S3). Such conversion can be rendered by either CPU 211 (FIG. 1) orSignal Processor 208. The digital audio data is transferred to SoundProcessor 205 (FIG. 1) via Data Bus 203 and text and numeric informationare retrieved therefrom (S4). CPU 211 designates the predetermined fontand color to the text and numeric information (S5) and also designates atag to such information (S6). After these tasks are completed the tagand the text and numeric information are stored in RAM 206 and displayedon LCD 201 (S7).

This paragraph illustrates how the text and numeric information as wellas the tag are displayed. On LCD 201 the text and numeric information702 (‘XXXXXXXXX’) are displayed with the predetermined font and color aswell as with the tag 701 (‘John’).

<<Audio/Video Data Capturing System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audio/video capturing system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

Assuming that Device A, a Communication Device 200, captures audio/videodata and transfers such data to Device B, another Communication Device200, via a host (not shown). Primarily video data is input from CCD Unit214 (FIG. 1) and audio data is input from Microphone 215 of (FIG. 1) ofDevice A.

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 267 which storesvideo data, Area 268 which stores audio data, and Area 265 which is awork area utilized for the process explained hereinafter.

In this embodiment, the video data input from CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) (S1a) is converted from analog data to digital data (S2 a) and is processedby Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S3 a). Area 265 is used as work areafor such process. The processed video data is stored in Area 267 of RAM206 (S4 a) and is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S5 a). The audio datainput from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1 b) is converted from analog datato digital data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2 b) and is processed by SoundProcessor 205 (FIG. 1) (S3 b). Area 265 is used as work area for suchprocess. The processed audio data is stored in Area 268 of RAM 206 (S4b) and is transferred to Sound Processor 205 and is output from Speaker216 (FIG. 1) via D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S5 b). The sequences of S1 a throughS5 a and S1 b through S5 b are continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or by the voice recognition system (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence to transfer the video data andthe audio data via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion. CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Device A initiates a dialing process (S1) until the line isconnected to a host (not shown) (S2). As soon as the line is connected,CPU 211 reads the video data and the audio data stored in Area 267 andArea 268 (S3) and transfer them to Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) wherethe data are converted into a transferring data (S4). The transferringdata is transferred from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) in a wireless fashion(S5). The sequence of S1 through S5 is continued until a specific signalindicating to stop such sequence is input from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1)or via the voice recognition system (S6). The line is disconnectedthereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the basic structure of the transferred datawhich is transferred from Device A as described in S4 and S5hereinbefore. Transferred data 610 is primarily composed of Header 611,video data 612, audio data 613, relevant data 614, and Footer 615. Videodata 612 corresponds to the video data stored in Area 267 of RAM 206,and audio data 613 corresponds to the audio data stored in Area 268 ofRAM 206. Relevant Data 614 includes various types of data, such as theidentification numbers of Device A (i.e., transferor device) and DeviceB (i.e., the transferee device), a location data which represents thelocation of Device A, email data transferred from Device A to Device B,etc. Header 611 and Footer 615 represent the beginning and the end ofTransferred Data 610 respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the data contained in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) ofDevice B. RAM 206 includes Area 269 which stores video data, Area 270which stores audio data, and Area 266 which is a work area utilized forthe process explained hereinafter.

In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Device B initiates a dialingprocess (S1) until Device B is connected to a host (not shown) (S2).Transferred Data 610 is received by Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) of Device B(S3) and is converted by Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1) into datareadable by CPU 211 (S4). Video data and audio data are retrieved fromTransferred Data 610 and stored into Area 269 and Area 270 of RAM 206respectively (S5). The video data stored in Area 269 is processed byVideo Processor 202 (FIG. 1) (S6 a). The processed video data isconverted into an analog data (S7 a) and displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S8 a). S7 a may not be necessary depending on the type of LCD 201 used.The audio data stored in Area 270 is processed by Sound Processor 205(FIG. 1) (S6 b). The processed audio data is converted into analog databy D/A 204 (FIG. 1) (S7 b) and output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S8 b).The sequences of S6 a through S8 a and S6 b through S8 b are continueduntil a specific signal indicating to stop such sequence is input fromInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via the voice recognition system (S9).

<<Caller ID System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the caller ID system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Table C. Each phone numbercorresponds to a specific color and sound. For example Phone #1corresponds to Color A and Sound E; Phone #2 corresponds to Color B andSound F; Phone #3 corresponds to Color C and Sound G; and Phone #4corresponds to color D and Sound H.

In this embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects orinputs a phone number (S1) and selects a specific color (S2) and aspecific sound (S3) designated for that phone number by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1). Such sequence can be repeated until there is aspecific input signal from Input Device 210 ordering to do otherwise(S4).

In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) periodically checks whether it hasreceived a call from other communication devices (S1). If it receives acall (S2), CPU 211 scans Table C to see whether the phone number of thecaller device is registered in the table (S3). If there is a match (S4),the designated color is output from Indicator 212 (FIG. 1) and thedesignated sound is output from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S5). For exampleif the incoming call is from Phone #1, Color A is output from Indicator212 and Sound E is output from Speaker 216.

<<Call Blocking Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the so-called ‘call blocking’function of Communication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 273 and Area 274.Area 273 stores phone numbers that should be blocked. In thisembodiment, Phone #1, Phone #2, and Phone #3 are blocked. Area 274stores a message data, preferably a wave data, stating that the phonecan not be connected.

This paragraph illustrates the operation of Communication Device 200.When Communication Device 200 receives a call (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)scans Area 273 of RAM 206 (S2). If the phone number of the incoming callmatches one of the phone numbers stored in Area 273 (S3), CPU 211 sendsthe message data stored in Area 274 of RAM 206 to the caller device (S4)and disconnects the line (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the method of updating Area 273 of RAM 206.Assuming that the phone number of the incoming call does not match anyof the phone numbers stored in Area 273 of RAM 206 (see S3hereinbefore). In that case, Communication Device 200 is connected tothe caller device. However, the user of Communication Device 200 maydecide to have such number ‘blocked’ after all. If that is the case, theuser dials ‘999’ while the line is connected. Technically CPU 211(FIG. 1) periodically checks the signals input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). If the input signal represents a numerical data ‘999’from Input Device 210 (S2), CPU 211 adds the phone number of the pendingcall to Area 273 (S3) and sends the message data stored in Area 274 ofRAM 206 to the caller device (S4). The line is disconnected thereafter(S5).

The following paragraphs illustrate another embodiment of the presentinvention.

In this embodiment, Host H (not shown) includes Area 403 and Area 404.Area 403 stores phone numbers that should be blocked to be connected toCommunication Device 200. In this embodiment, Phone #1, Phone #2, andPhone #3 are blocked for Device A; Phone #4, Phone #5, and Phone #6 areblocked for Device B; and Phone #7, Phone #8, and Phone #9 are blockedfor Device C. Area 404 stores a message data stating that the phone cannot be connected.

Paragraph [0072]—This Paragraph [0072] illustrates the operation of HostH (not shown). Assuming that the caller device is attempting to connectto Device B, Communication Device 200. Host H periodically checks thesignals from all Communication Device 200 (S1). If Host H detects a callfor Device B (S2), it scans Area 403 (S3) and checks whether the phonenumber of the incoming call matches one of the phone numbers storedtherein for Device B (S4). If the phone number of the incoming call doesnot match any of the phone numbers stored in Area 403, the line isconnected to Device B (S5 b). On the other hand, if the phone number ofthe incoming call matches one of the phone numbers stored in Area 403,the line is ‘blocked,’ i.e., not connected to Device B (S5 a) and Host Hsends the massage data stored in Area 404 to the caller device (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the method of updating Area 403 of Host H.Assuming that the phone number of the incoming call does not match anyof the phone numbers stored in Area 403 (see S4 described hereinbefore).In that case, Host H allows the connection between the caller device andCommunication Device 200, however, the user of Communication Device 200may decide to have such number ‘blocked’ after all. If that is the case,the user simply dials ‘999’ while the line is connected. TechnicallyHost H periodically checks the signals input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). If the input signal represents ‘999’ from Input Device210 (FIG. 1) (S2), Host H adds the phone number of the pending call toArea 403 (S3) and sends the message data stored in Area 404 to thecaller device (S4). The line is disconnected thereafter (S5).

As another embodiment of the method illustrated in the previousparagraph, Host H may delegate some of its tasks to Communication Device200. Namely, Communication Device 200 periodically checks the signalsinput from Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). If the input signal represents anumeric data ‘999’ from Input Device 210, Communication Device 200 sendsto Host H a block request signal as well as with the phone number of thepending call. Host H, upon receiving the block request signal fromCommunication Device 200, adds the phone number of the pending call toArea 403 and sends the message data stored in Area 404 to the callerdevice. The line is disconnected thereafter.

<<Navigation System>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the navigation system ofCommunication Device 200 (FIG. 1).

In this embodiment, RAM 206 (FIG. 1) includes Area 275, Area 276, Area277, and Area 295. Area 275 stores a plurality of map data,two-dimensional (2D) image data, which are designed to be displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). Area 276 stores a plurality of object data,three-dimensional (3D) image data, which are also designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201. The object data are primarily displayed by amethod so-called ‘texture mapping’ which is explained in detailshereinafter. Here, the object data include the three-dimensional data ofvarious types of objects that are displayed on LCD 201, such as bridges,houses, hotels, motels, inns, gas stations, restaurants, streets,traffic lights, street signs, trees, etc. Area 277 stores a plurality oflocation data, i.e., data representing the locations of the objectsstored in Area 276. Area 277 also stores a plurality of datarepresenting the street address of each object stored in Area 276. Inaddition, Area 277 stores the current position data of CommunicationDevice 200 and the Destination Data which are explained in detailshereafter. The map data stored in Area 275 and the location data storedin Area 277 are linked each other. Area 295 stores a plurality ofattribution data attributing to the map data stored in Area 275 andlocation data stored in Area 277, such as road blocks, trafficaccidents, and road constructions, and traffic jams. The attributiondata stored in Area 295 is updated periodically by receiving an updateddata from a host (not shown).

In this embodiment, Video Processor 202 (FIG. 1) includes texturemapping processor 290. Texture mapping processor 290 produces polygonsin a three-dimensional space and ‘pastes’ textures to each polygon. Theconcept of such method is described in the following patents and thereferences cited thereof: U.S. Pat. No. 5,870,101, U.S. Pat. No.6,157,384, U.S. Pat. No. 5,774,125, U.S. Pat. No. 5,375,206, and/or U.S.Pat. No. 5,925,127.

In this embodiment, the voice recognition system is activated when CPU211 (FIG. 1) detects a specific signal input from Input Device 210(FIG. 1) (S1). After the voice recognition system is activated, theinput current position mode starts and the current position ofCommunication Device 200 is input by voice recognition system. Thecurrent position can also be input from Input Device 210. As anotherembodiment of the present invention, the current position canautomatically be detected by the method so-called ‘global positioningsystem’ or ‘GPS’ and input the current data therefrom. After the processof inputting the current data is completed, the input destination modestarts and the destination is input by the voice recognition systemexplained above or by the Input Device 210 (S3), and the voicerecognition system is deactivated after the process of inputting theDestination Data is completed by utilizing such system (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the input current positionmode described in S2 described hereinbefore. When analog audio data isinput from Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1), such data is converted intodigital audio data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audio data isprocessed by Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) to retrieve text and numericdata therefrom (S3). The retrieved data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S4). The data can be corrected by repeating the sequence of S1 throughS4 until the correct data is displayed (S5). If the correct data isdisplayed, such data is registered as current position data (S6). Asstated above, the current position data can be input manually by InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) and/or can be automatically input by utilizing themethod so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ as describedhereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the input destination modedescribed in S3 described hereinbefore. When analog audio data is inputfrom Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) (S1), such data is converted into digitalaudio data by A/D 213 (FIG. 1) (S2). The digital audio data is processedby Sound Processor 205 (FIG. 1) to retrieve text and numeric datatherefrom (S3). The retrieved data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S4). The data can be corrected by repeating the sequence of S1 throughS4 until the correct data is displayed on LCD 201 (S5). If the correctdata is displayed, such data is registered as Destination Data (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of displaying the shortest routefrom the current position to the destination. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrievesboth the current position data and the Destination Data which are inputby the method described hereinbefore from Area 277 of RAM 206 (FIG. 1).By utilizing the location data of streets, bridges, traffic lights andother relevant data, CPU 211 calculates the shortest route to thedestination (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevant two-dimensionalmap data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area 275 of RAM 206(S2).

As another embodiment of the present invention, by way of utilizing thelocation data stored in Area 277, CPU 211 may produce athree-dimensional map by composing the three dimensional objects (bymethod so-called ‘texture mapping’ as described above) which are storedin Area 276 of RAM 206. The two-dimensional map and/or the threedimensional map is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

As another embodiment of the present invention, the attribution datastored in Area 295 of RAM 206 may be utilized. Namely if any road block,traffic accident, road construction, and/or traffic jam is included inthe shortest route calculated by the method mentioned above, CPU 211(FIG. 1) calculates the second shortest route to the destination. If thesecond shortest route still includes road block, traffic accident, roadconstruction, and/or traffic jam, CPU 211 calculates the third shortestroute to the destination. CPU 211 calculates repeatedly until thecalculated route does not include any road block, traffic accident, roadconstruction, and/or traffic jam. The shortest route to the destinationis highlighted by a significant color (such as red) to enable the userof Communication Device 200 to easily recognize such route on LCD 201(FIG. 1).

As another embodiment of the present invention, an image which issimilar to the one which is observed by the user in the real world maybe displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) by utilizing the three-dimensionalobject data. In order to produce such image, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) identifiesthe present location and retrieves the corresponding location data fromArea 277 of RAM 206. Then CPU 211 retrieves a plurality of object datawhich correspond to such location data from Area 276 of RAM 206 anddisplays a plurality of objects on LCD 201 based on such object data ina manner the user of Communication Device 200 may observe from thecurrent location.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of updating the shortest routeto the destination while Communication Device 200 is moving. By way ofperiodically and automatically inputting the current position by themethod so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ as describedhereinbefore, the current position is continuously updated (S1). Byutilizing the location data of streets and traffic lights and otherrelevant data, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) recalculates the shortest route to thedestination (S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevant two-dimensionalmap data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area 275 of RAM 206(S3). Instead, by way of utilizing the location data stored in Area 277.CPU 211 may produce a three-dimensional map by composing the threedimensional objects by method so-called ‘texture mapping’ which arestored in Area 276 of RAM 206. The two-dimensional map and/or thethree-dimensional map is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4). Theshortest route to the destination is re-highlighted by a significantcolor (such as red) to enable the user of Communication Device 200 toeasily recognize the updated route on LCD 201.

This paragraph illustrates the method of finding the shortest locationof the desired facility, such as restaurant, hotel, gas station, etc.The voice recognition system is activated in the manner describedhereinbefore (S1). By way of utilizing the voice recognition system, acertain type of facility is selected from the options displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). The prepared options can be a) restaurant, b) lodge, andc) gas station (S2). Once one of the options is selected, CPU 211(FIG. 1) calculates and inputs the current position by the methoddescribed hereinbefore (S3). From the data selected in S2, CPU 211 scansArea 277 of RAM 206 and searches the location of the facilities of theselected category (such as restaurant) which is the closest to thecurrent position (S4). CPU 211 then retrieves the relevanttwo-dimensional map data which should be displayed on LCD 201 from Area275 of RAM 206 (S5). Instead, by way of utilizing the location datastored in 277 (Paragraph [0077]), CPU 211 may produce athree-dimensional map by composing the three dimensional objects bymethod so-called ‘texture mapping’ which are stored in Area 276 of RAM206. The two-dimensional map and/or the three dimensional map isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S6). The shortest route to thedestination is re-highlighted by a significant color (such as red) toenable the user of Communication Device 200 to easily recognize theupdated route on LCD 201. The voice recognition system is deactivatedthereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates the method of displaying the time anddistance to the destination. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the currentposition wherein the source data can be input from the method describedin hereinbefore (S1). The distance is calculated from the methoddescribed hereinbefore(S2). The speed is calculated from the distancewhich Communication Device 200 has proceeded within specific period oftime (S3). The distance to the destination and the time left aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4 and S5).

This paragraph illustrates the method of warning and giving instructionswhen the user of Communication Device 200 deviates from the correctroute. By way of periodically and automatically inputting the currentposition by the method so-called ‘global positioning system’ or ‘GPS’ asdescribed hereinbefore, the current position is continuously updated(S1). If the current position deviates from the correct route (S2), awarning is given from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) and/or on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S3). The method is repeated for a certain period of time. If thedeviation still exists after such period of time has passed, CPU 211(FIG. 1) initiates the sequence described hereinbefore and calculatesthe shortest route to the destination and display it on LCD 201. Thedetails of such sequence is as same as the one explained hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the overall operation of Communication Device200 regarding the navigation system and the communication system. WhenCommunication Device 200 receives data from Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) (S1),CPU 211 (FIG. 1) determines whether the data is navigation data, i.e.,data necessary to operate the navigation system (S2). If the datareceived is a navigation data, the navigation system describedhereinbefore is performed (S3). On the other hand, if the data receivedis a communication data (S4), the communication system, i.e., the systemnecessary for wireless communication which is mainly described in FIG. 1is performed (S5).

<<Auto Time Adjust Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the automatic time adjust function,i.e., a function which automatically adjusts the clock of CommunicationDevice 200.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, RAM 206 includes Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069a, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b, and Auto Time Data StorageArea 2069 c. Auto Time Adjust Software Storage Area 2069 a storessoftware program to implement the present function which is explained indetails hereinafter, Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b stores thedata which represents the current time, and Auto Time Data Storage Area2069 c is a working area assigned for implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates a software program stored in Auto Time AdjustSoftware Storage Area 2069 a . First of all, Communication Device 200 isconnected to Network NT (e.g., the Internet) via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves an atomic clock data from NetworkNT (S2) and the current time data from Current Time Data Storage Area2069 b , and compares both data. If the difference between both data isnot within the predetermined value X (S3), CPU 211 adjusts the currenttime data (S4). The method to adjust the current data can be eithersimply overwrite the data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069b with the atomic clock data retrieved from Network NT or calculate thedifference of the two data and add or subtract the difference to or fromthe current time data stored in Current Time Data Storage Area 2069 b byutilizing Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c as a working area.

This paragraph illustrates another software program stored in Auto TimeAdjust Software Storage Area 2069 a . When the power of CommunicationDevice 200 is turned on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) stores a predeterminedtimer value in Auto Time Data Storage Area 2069 c (S2). The timer valueis decremented periodically (S3). When the timer value equals to zero(S4), the automatic timer adjust function is activated (S5) and CPU 211performs the sequence described in hereinbefore, and the sequence of S2through S4 is repeated thereafter.

<<Calculator Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the calculator function ofCommunication Device 200. Communication Device 200 can be utilized as acalculator to perform mathematical calculation by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep, and the calculator function is activated (S3 c) when thecalculator function is selected in the previous step. The modesdisplayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may includeall functions and modes explained in this specification. Once theselected mode is activated, another mode can be activated while thefirst activated mode is still implemented by going through the steps ofS1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previous Paragraph) and to perform the calculator function isstored in Calculator Information Storage Area 20615 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Calculator InformationStorage Area 20615 a . In this embodiment, Calculator InformationStorage Area 20615 a includes Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 band Calculator Data Storages Area 20615 c. Calculator Software StorageArea 20615 b stores the software programs to implement the presentfunction, such as the one explained in, hereinafter and Calculator DataStorage Area 20615 c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute thesoftware programs stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b andto implement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in CalculatorStorage Area 20615 b . In this embodiment, one or more of numeric dataare input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system as well as the arithmetic operators (e.g., ‘+’, ‘−’,and ‘×’), which are temporarily stored in Calculator Data Storage Area20615 c (S1). By utilizing the data stored in Calculator Data StorageArea 20615 c, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) performs the calculation by executing thesoftware program stored in Calculator Software Storage Area 20615 b(S2). The result of the calculation is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)thereafter (S3).

<<Spreadsheet Function>>

The following paragraphs through illustrate the spreadsheet function ofCommunication Device 200. Here, the spreadsheet is composed of aplurality of cells which are aligned in matrix. In other words, thespreadsheet is divided into a plurality of rows and columns in whichalphanumeric data is capable to be input. Microsoft Excel is the typicalexample of the spreadsheet.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep, and the spreadsheet function is activated (S3 c) when thespreadsheet function is selected in the previous step. The modesdisplayed on LCD 201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may includeall functions and modes explained in this specification. Once theselected mode is activated, another mode can be activated while thefirst activated mode is still implemented by going through the steps ofS1 through S3 for another mode, thereby enabling a plurality offunctions and modes being performed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c, and the data to activate (as described in S3c of the previous paragraph) and to perform the spreadsheet function isstored in Spreadsheet Information Storage Area 20616 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Spreadsheet InformationStorage Area 20616 a . In this embodiment, Spreadsheet InformationStorage Area 20616 a includes Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 band Spreadsheet Data Storage Area 20616 c. Spreadsheet Software StorageArea 20616 b stores the software programs to implement the presentfunction, such as the one explained hereinafter, and Spreadsheet DataStorage Area 20616 c stores a plurality of data necessary to execute thesoftware programs stored in Spreadsheet Software Storage Area 20616 band to implement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SpreadsheetSoftware Storage Area 20616 b . In this embodiment, a certain cell of aplurality of cells displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Theselected cell is highlighted by a certain manner, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1)stores the location of the selected cell in Spreadsheet Data StorageArea 20616 c (S1). One or more of alphanumeric data are input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system into the cellselected in S1, and CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data in SpreadsheetData Storage Area 20616 c (S2). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric dataon LCD 201 thereafter (S3). The sequence of S1 through S3 can berepeated for a numerous amount of times and saved and closed thereafter.

<<Word Processing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the word processing function ofCommunication Device 200. By way of implementing such function,Communication Device 200 can be utilized as a word processor which hasthe similar functions to Microsoft Words. The word processing functionprimarily includes the following functions: the bold formattingfunction, the italic formatting function, the image pasting function,the font formatting function, the spell check function, the underliningfunction, the page numbering function, and the bullets and numberingfunction. Here, the bold formatting function makes the selectedalphanumeric data bold. The italic formatting function makes theselected alphanumeric data italic. The image pasting function pastes theselected image to a document to the selected location. The fontformatting function changes the selected alphanumeric data to theselected font. The spell check function fixes spelling and grammaticalerrors of the alphanumeric data in the document. The underliningfunction adds underlines to the selected alphanumeric data. The pagenumbering function adds page numbers to each page of a document at theselected location. The bullets and numbering function adds the selectedtype of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphs.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinafter, and the wordprocessing function is activated (S3 c) when the word processingfunction is selected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functionsand modes explained in this specification. Once the selected mode isactivated, another mode can be activated while the first activated modeis still implemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 foranother mode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In thisembodiment, the data to activate (as described in S3 a of the previousparagraph) and to perform the communication mode is stored inCommunication Data Storage Area 2061 a, the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 b of the previous paragraph) and to perform the gamedownload mode and the game play mode are stored in Game DL/Play DataStorage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which the details are describedhereinafter, and the data to activate (as described in S3 c of theprevious paragraph) and to perform the word processing function isstored in Word Processing Information Storage Area 20617 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word ProcessingInformation Storage Area 20617 a . Word Processing Information StorageArea 20617 a includes Word Processing Software Storage Area 20617 b andWord Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c. Word processing SoftwareStorage Area 20617 b stores the software programs described hereinafter,and Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 c stores a plurality of datadescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in WordProcessing Software Storage Area 20617 b . Word Processing SoftwareStorage Area 20617 b stores Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1,Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2, Italic Formatting Software 20617 b3, Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4, Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5,Spell Check Software 20617 b 6, Underlining Software 20617 b 7, PageNumbering Software 20617 b 8, and Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b9. Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1 inputs to a document aseries of alphanumeric data in accordance to the input signals producedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2 implements the bold formattingfunction which makes the selected alphanumeric data bold of which thesequence is described hereinafter. Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3implements the italic formatting function which makes the selectedalphanumeric data italic of which the sequence is described hereinafter.Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4 implements the image pasting functionwhich pastes the selected image to a document to the selected locationof which the sequence is described hereinafter. Font Formatting Software20617 b 5 implements the font formatting function which changes theselected alphanumeric data to the selected font of which the sequence isdescribed hereinafter. Spell Check Software 20617 b 6 implements thespell check function which fixes spelling and grammatical errors of thealphanumeric data in a document of which the sequence is describedhereinafter. Underlining Software 20617 b 7 implements the underliningfunction which adds the selected underlines to the selected alphanumericdata of which the sequence is described hereinafter. Page NumberingSoftware 20617 b 8 implements the page numbering function which addspage numbers at the selected location to each page of a document ofwhich the sequence is described hereinafter. Bullets And NumberingSoftware 20617 b 9 implements the bullets and numbering function whichadds the selected type of bullets and numbers to the selected paragraphsof which the sequence is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Word Processing DataStorage Area 20617 c . Word Processing Data Storage Area 20617 cincludes Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617 c 1, Bold Formatting DataStorage Area 20617 c 2, Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 3,Image Data Storage Area 20617 c 4, Font Formatting Data Storage Area20617 c 5, Spell Check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6, Underlining DataStorage Area 20617 c 7, Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 8, andBullets And Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9. Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20617 c 1 stores the basic text and numeric data which arenot decorated by bold and/or italic (the default font may be couriernew). Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2 stores the text andnumeric data which are decorated by bold. Italic Formatting Data StorageArea 20617 c 3 stores the text and numeric data which are decorated byitalic. Image Data Storage Area 20617 c 4 stores the data representingthe location of the image data pasted in a document and the image dataitself. Font Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5 stores a pluralityof types of fonts, such as arial, century, courier new, tahoma, andtimes new roman, of all text and numeric data stored in AlphanumericData Storage Area 20617 c 1. Spell check Data Storage Area 20617 c 6stores a plurality of spell check data, i.e., a plurality of correcttext and numeric data for purposes of being compared with thealphanumeric data input in a document and a plurality of pattern datafor purposes of checking the grammatical errors therein. UnderliningData Storage Area 20617 c 7 stores a plurality of data representingunderlines of different types. Page Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c8 stores the data representing the location of page numbers to bedisplayed in a document and the page number of each page of a document.Bullets And Numbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9 stores a plurality ofdata representing different types of bullets and numbering and thelocation which they are added.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Alphanumeric Data Input Software 20617 b 1. A plurality ofalphanumeric data is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). The corresponding alphanumeric data isretrieved from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20617 c 1 (S2), and thedocument including the alphanumeric data retrieved in S2 is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bold Formatting Software 20617 b 2. One or more of alphanumeric dataare selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, a bold formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thebold formatting data from Bold Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 2(S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the boldformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replacedbold formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Italic Formatting Software 20617 b 3. One or more of alphanumericdata are selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, an italic formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves theitalic formatting data from Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c3 (S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with theitalic formatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with thereplaced italic formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Image Pasting Software 20617 b 4. The image to be pasted is selectedby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Here, the image may be of any type, such as JPEG, GIF, and TIFF.Next the location in a document where the image is to be pasted isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system(S2). The data representing the location is stored in Image Pasting DataStorage Area 20617 c 4 . The image is pasted at the location selected inS2 and the image is stored in Image Pasting Data Storage Area 20617 c 4(S3). The document with the pasted image is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Font Formatting Software 20617 b 5. One or more of alphanumeric dataare selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). Next, a font formatting signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves thefont formatting data from Italic Formatting Data Storage Area 20617 c 5(S3), and replaces the alphanumeric data selected in S1 with the fontformatting data retrieved in S3 (S4). The document with the replacedfont formatting data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Spell Check Software 20617 b 6. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans allalphanumeric data in a document (S1). CPU 211 then compares thealphanumeric data with the spell check data stored in Spell Check DataStorage Area 20617 c 6, i.e., a plurality of correct text and numericdata for purposes of being compared with the alphanumeric data input ina document and a plurality of pattern data for purposes of checking thegrammatical errors therein (S2). CPU 211 corrects the alphanumeric dataand/or corrects the grammatical errors (S3), and the document with thecorrected alphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Underlining Software 20617 b 7. One or more of alphanumeric data areselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). Next, an underlining signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (e.g., selecting a specific icon displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) or selecting a specific item from a pulldown menu) or via voicerecognition system to select the type of the underline to be added (S2).CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then retrieves the underlining data from UnderliningData Storage Area 20617 c 7 (S3), and adds to the alphanumeric dataselected in S1 (S4). The document with underlines added to the selectedalphanumeric data is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Page Numbering Software 20617 b 8. A page numbering signal is inputby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Next, the location to display the page number is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then stores the location of the page number to be displayed inPage Numbering Storage Area 20617 c 8, and adds the page number to eachpage of a document at the selected location (S3). The document with pagenumbers is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Bullets And Numbering Software 20617 b 9. A paragraph is selected byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Next, the type of the bullets and/or numbering is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then stores the identification data of the paragraph selectedin S1 and the type of the bullets and/or numbering in Bullets AndNumbering Data Storage Area 20617 c 9 , and adds the bullets and/ornumbering to the selected paragraph of a document (S3). The documentwith the bullets and/or numbering is displayed on LCD 201 thereafter(S4).

<<TV Remote Controller Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the TV remote controller functionwhich enables Communication Device 200 to be utilized as a TV remotecontroller.

This paragraph illustrates the connection between Communication Device200 and TV 802. Communication Device 200 is connected in a wirelessfashion to Network NT, such as the Internet, and Network NT is connectedto TV 802 in a wireless fashion. Communication Device 200 may beconnected to TV 802 via one or more of artificial satellites, forexample, in the manner described hereinbefore. Communication Device 200may also be connected to TV 802 via Sub-host as described hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of connectingCommunication Device 200 with TV 802. Communication Device 200 maydirectly connect to TV 802 in a wireless fashion. Here, CommunicationDevice 200 may utilize Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) and/or LED 219 as describedhereinafter to be connected with TV 802 in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the connection between Communication Device200 and TV Server TVS. Communication Device 200 is connected in awireless fashion to Network NT, such as the Internet, and Network NT isconnected to TV Server TVS in a wireless fashion. Communication Device200 may be connected to TV Server TVS via one or more of artificialsatellites and/or TV Server TVS may be carried by an artificialsatellite, for example, in the manner described hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Server TVS. TV ServerTVS includes TV Program Information Storage Area H18 b of which thedetails are explained hereinafter, and TV Program Listing Storage AreaH18 c of which the details are explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Program InformationStorage Area H18 b . TV Program Information Storage Area H18 b includesfive types of data: ‘CH’, ‘Title’, ‘Sum’, ‘Start’, ‘Stop’, and ‘Cat’.Here, ‘CH’ represents the channel number of the TV programs available onTV 802; ‘Title’ represents the title of each TV program; ‘Sum’represents the summary of each TV program; ‘Start’ represents thestarting time of each TV program; ‘Stop’ represents the ending time ofeach TV program, and ‘Cat’ represents the category to which each TVprogram pertains.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Program Listing StorageArea H18 c . TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c includes four typesof data: ‘CH’, ‘Title’, ‘Start’, and ‘Stop’. Here, ‘CH’ represents thechannel number of the TV programs available on TV 802; ‘Title’represents the title of each TV program; ‘Start’ represents the startingtime of each TV program; and ‘Stop’ represents the ending time of eachTV program. The data stored in TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c aredesigned to be ‘clipped’ and to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 in the manner described hereinafter. As anotherembodiment, TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c may be combined withTV Program Information Storage Area H18 b and extract the data of ‘CH’,‘Title’, ‘Start’, and ‘Stop’ therefrom.

This paragraph illustrates the elements of Communication Device 200. Theelements of Communication Device 200 is identical to the ones describedin FIG. 1, except Communication Device 200 has new element, i.e., LED219. Here, LED 219 receives infra red signals from other wirelessdevices, which are transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. LED 219 alsosends infra red signals in a wireless fashion which are composed by CPU211 and transferred via Data Bus 203. As the second embodiment, LED 219may be connected to Signal Processor 208. Here, LED 219 transfers thereceived infra red signals to Signal Processor 208, and Signal Processor208 processes and converts the signals to a CPU readable format whichare transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. The data produced by CPU211 are processed by Signal Processor 208 and transferred to anotherdevice via LED 219 in a wireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as sameas that of Antenna 218 described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizesinfra red signals for implementing wireless communication in the secondembodiment. For the avoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g.,referring to FIG. 1 in parenthesis) automatically refers to thisparagraph in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the software program installed in eachCommunication Device 200 to initiate the present function. First of all,a list of modes is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). When an inputsignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system to select a specific mode (S2), the selected mode isactivated. In the present example, the communication mode is activated(S3 a) when the communication mode is selected in the previous step, thegame download mode and the game play mode are activated (S3 b) when thegame download mode and the game play mode are selected in the previousstep of which the details are described hereinbefore, and the TV remotecontroller function is activated (S3 c) when the TV remote controllerfunction is selected in the previous step. The modes displayed on LCD201 in S1 which are selectable in S2 and S3 may include all functionsand modes explained in this specification. Once the selected mode isactivated, another mode can be activated while the first activated modeis still implemented by going through the steps of S1 through S3 foranother mode, thereby enabling a plurality of functions and modes beingperformed simultaneously (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). The datato activate (as described in S3 a of the previous paragraph) and toperform the communication mode is stored in Communication Data StorageArea 2061 a, the data to activate (as described in S3 b of the previousparagraph) and to perform the game download mode and the game play modeare stored in Game DL/Play Data Storage Area 2061 b/2061 c of which thedetails are described in paragraph [0128], and the data to activate (asdescribed in S3 c of the previous paragraph) and to perform the TVremote controller function is stored in TV Remote Controller InformationStorage Area 20618 a.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Remote ControllerInformation Storage Area 20618 a. TV Remote Controller InformationStorage Area 20618 a includes TV Remote Controller Software Storage Area20618 b and TV Remote Controller Data Storage Area 20618 c. TV RemoteController Software Storage Area 20618 b stores a plurality of softwareprograms to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter, and TV Remote Controller Data Storage Area 20618 c stores aplurality of data to implement the present function such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Remote Controller DataStorage Area 20618 c . TV Remote Controller Data Storage Area 20618 cincludes, Channel List Data Storage Area 20618 c 1, TV ProgramInformation Storage Area 20618 c 2, and TV Program Listing Storage Area20618 c 3. Channel list Data Storage Area 20618 c 1 stores a list ofchannel numbers available on TV 802. TV Program Information Storage Area20618 c 2 stores the data transferred from TV Program InformationStorage Area H18 b of TV Server TVS (Paragraph [0129]). The data storedin TV Program Information Storage Area 20618 c 2 is identical to theones stored in TV Program Information Storage Area H18 b or may be theportion thereof. TV Program Listing Storage Area 20618 c 3 stores thedata transferred from TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c of TV ServerTVS. The data stored in TV Program Listing Storage Area 20618 c 3 isidentical to the ones stored in TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c ormay be the portion thereof.

This paragraph illustrates the Channel Numbers 20118 a displayed on LCD201. Ten channel numbers are displayed on LCD 201, i.e., channel numbers‘1’ through ‘10’. The highlighted Channel Number 20118 a is the onewhich is currently displayed on TV 802. In the present example, channelnumber 20188 a ‘4 ’ is highlighted, therefore, Channel 4 is currentlyshown on TV 802.

This paragraph illustrates one of the software programs stored in TVRemote Controller Software Storage Area 20618 b to display and selectChannel Number 20118 a . CPU 211 displays a channel list comprising aplurality of Channel Numbers 20118 a on LCD 201 (S1). In the exampledescribed hereinbefore, ten channel numbers are displayed on LCD 201,i.e., channel numbers ‘1’ through ‘10’. The user of Communication Device200 inputs a channel selecting signal by utilizing Input Device 210 orvia voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 highlights the selectedchannel in the manner described hereinbefore (S3), and sends to TV 802via LED 209 in a wireless fashion the TV channel signal (S4). The TVprogram of Channel 4 is displayed on TV 802 thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Information 20118 c displayed onLCD 201. When the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a specificsignal utilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system, TVProgram Information 20118 c currently shown on Channel Number 20118 bselected in S2 described hereinbefore is displayed on LCD 201. TVProgram Information 20118 c includes Channel Number 20118 b, ‘Title’,‘Summary’, ‘Start Time’, ‘Stop Time’, and ‘Category’. Here, ChannelNumber 20118 b represents the channel number of the TV program currentlyshown on Channel Number 20118 b (i.e., the channel number selected inS2, ‘Title’ represents the title of the TV program currently shown onChannel Number 20118 b, ‘Summary’ represents the summary of the TVprogram currently shown on Channel Number 20118 b, ‘Start Time’represents the starting time of the TV program currently shown onChannel Number 20118 b, ‘Stop Time’ represents the ending time of the TVprogram currently shown on Channel Number 20118 b, and ‘Category’represents the category to which the TV program currently shown onChannel Number 20118 b pertains.

This paragraph illustrates one of the software programs stored in TVRemote Controller Software Storage Area 20618 b which displays TVProgram Information 20118 c on LCD 201. When the user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects the TV program information display mode by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211 accessesTV Server TVS and retrieves the data (i.e., ‘Title’, ‘Summary’, ‘StartTime’, ‘Stop Time’, and ‘Category’ described hereinbefore) of TV programcurrently shown on Channel Number 20118 b from TV Program InformationStorage Area H18 b (S2), and displays as TV Program Information 20118 con LCD 201 as described in hereinbefore (S3). TV Program Information20118 c may be web-based.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Listing 20118 d displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). ‘PRn’ represents a title of a TV program, and ‘CHn’represents Channel Number 20118 a. TV Program Pr 1 is shown on Channel 1and starts from 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 2 isshown on Channel 1 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at 8:00 p.m.; TVProgram Pr 3 is shown on Channel 1 and starts from 8:00 p.m. and ends at9:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 4 is shown on Channel 2 and starts from 6:00p.m. and ends at 8:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 5 is shown on Channel 2 andstarts from 8:00 p.m. and ends at 9:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 6 is shown onChannel 3 and starts from 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; and TVProgram Pr 7 is shown on Channel 3 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at9:00 p.m. The TV program displayed on LCD 201 is selected by way ofmoving the cursor displayed thereon by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system. In the present example, the cursor is locatedon TV Program Pr 2.

This paragraph illustrates one of the software programs stored in TVRemote Controller Software Storage Area 20618 b which displays TVProgram Listing 20118 d on LCD 201. When the user of CommunicationDevice 200 selects TV program listing display mode by utilizing InputDevice 210 or via voice recognition system (S1), CPU 211 accesses TVServer TVS and retrieves data (i.e., ‘Title’, ‘Start Time’, and ‘StopTime’) from TV Program Listing Storage Area H18 c (S2), and displays TVProgram Listing 20118 d on LCD 201 (S3). TV Program Listing 20118 d maybe web-based.

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Listing 20118 d displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) which enables to display TV Program Information 20118 c ofa selected TV program described hereinafter. ‘PRn’ represents a title ofa TV program, and ‘CHn’ represents Channel Number 20118 a. Referring tothe example described hereinbefore, TV Program Pr 1 is shown on Channel1 and starts from 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 2 isshown on Channel 1 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at 8:00 p.m.; TVProgram Pr 3 is shown on Channel 1 and starts from 8:00 p.m. and ends at9:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 4 is shown on Channel 2 and starts from 6:00p.m. and ends at 8:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 5 is shown on channel 2 andstarts from 8:00 p.m. and ends at 9:00 p.m.; TV Program Pr 6 is shown onChannel 3 and starts from 6:00 p.m. and ends at 7:00 p.m.; and TVProgram Pr 7 is shown on Channel 3 and starts from 7:00 p.m. and ends at9:00 p.m. The TV program displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) is selected byway of utilizing the cursor displayed thereon. The cursor can be movedfrom one TV program to another one by utilizing Input Device 210 or viavoice recognition system. In the present example, the cursor located onPr 2 (as described hereinbefore) is moved to Pr4.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of displaying TV ProgramInformation 20118 c from TV Program Listing 20118 d . First, CPU 211displays TV Program Listing 20118 d on LCD 201 (S1). Next, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the TV programs listed in TVProgram Listing 20118 d by moving the cursor displayed on LCD 201 (S2).CPU 211 sends via Antenna 218 to TV Server TVS a TV program informationrequest signal indicating TV Server TVS to send TV Program Information20118 c of the selected TV program (S3). CPU 211 retrieves TV ProgramInformation 20118 c from TV Server TVS via Antenna 218 (S4), anddisplays on LCD 201 thereafter as described hereinafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates TV Program Information 20118 c displayed onLCD 201 which is retrieved in S4 described hereinbefore. TV ProgramInformation 20118 c includes Channel Number 20118 b, ‘Title’, ‘Summary’,‘Start Time’, ‘Stop Time’, and ‘Category’. Here, Channel Number 20118 brepresents the channel number of the TV program selected in S2 describedhereinbefore, ‘Title’ represents the title of the TV program selected inS2 described hereinbefore, ‘Summary’ represents the summary of the TVprogram selected in S2 described hereinbefore, ‘Start Time’ representsthe starting time of the TV program selected in S2 describedhereinbefore, ‘Stop Time’ represents the ending time of the TV programselected in S2 described hereinbefore, and ‘Category’ represents thecategory to which the TV program selected in S2 described hereinbeforepertains.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the method to displayChannel Number 20118 a. Instead of displaying all the available ChannelNumbers 20118 a as described hereinbefore, only Channel Number 20118 acurrently shown on TV 802 may be displayed on LCD 201−. Channel Number20118 a ‘4’ in the present example.

<<Start Up Software Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the start up software programfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to automaticallyactivate (or start up) the registered software programs when the poweris on.

This paragraph illustrates the overall sequence of the present function.The user of Communication Device 200 presses the power button ofCommunication Device 200 (S1). Then the predetermined software programsautomatically activate (or start up) without having any instructionsfrom the user of Communication Device 200 (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included RAM 206 (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Start Up Information Storage Area 20621 a which isdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Start UpInformation Storage Area 20621 a . Start Up Information Storage Area20621 a includes Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b and Start UpData Storage Area 20621 c. Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 cstores the data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described in hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Start UpSoftware Storage Area 20621 b . Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 bstores Power On Detecting Software 20621 b 1, Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621 b 2, and Start Up Software Activating Software20621 b 3. Power On Detecting Software 20621 b 1 detects whether thepower of Communication Device 200 is on of which the sequence isdescribed hereinafter, Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621 b 2 identifies the software programs which are automaticallyactivated of which the sequence is described hereinafter, and Start UpSoftware Activating Software 20621 b 3 activates the identified softwareprograms identified by Start Up Data Storage Area Scanning Software20621 b 2 of which the sequence is described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Start Up DataStorage Area 20621 c . Start Up Data Storage Area 20621 c includes StartUp Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1. Here, Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621 c 1 stores the software program indexes, wherein asoftware program index is an unique information assigned to eachsoftware program as an identifier (e.g., title of a software program) ofwhich the details are explained in hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Start Up Software IndexStorage Area 20621 c 1. Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1stores the software program indexes of the software programs which areautomatically activated by the present function. Here, the softwareprograms may be any software programs explained in this specification.Three software program indexes, i.e., Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1a, Start Up Software Index 20621 c 1 b, and Start Up Software Index20621 c 1 c, are stored in Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c1 in the present example. The software program indexes can be createdand store in Start Up Software Index Storage Area 20621 c 1 manually byutilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Power On Detecting Software20621 b 1 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b . CPU 211(FIG. 1) checks the status of the power condition of CommunicationDevice 200 (S1). When the user of Communication Device 200 powers onCommunication Device 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such asby pressing a power button (S2), CPU 211 activates Start Up Data StorageArea Scanning Software 20621 b 2 of which the sequence is explainedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Data Storage AreaScanning Software 20621 b 2 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area20621 b . CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area20621 c 1 (S1), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S2). CPU 211 activates Start Up SoftwareActivating Software 20621 b 3 thereafter of which the sequence isexplained hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Start Up Software ActivatingSoftware 20621 b 3 stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b .CPU 211 (FIG. 1) activates the software programs of which the softwareprogram indexes are identified in S2 described hereinbefore (S1).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment wherein the three softwareprograms stored in Start Up Software Storage Area 20621 b (i.e., PowerOn Detecting Software 20621 b 1, Start Up Data Storage Area ScanningSoftware 20621 b 2, Start Up Software Activating Software 20621 b 3) isintegrated into one software program stored therein. CPU 211 (FIG. 1)checks the status of the power condition of Communication Device 200(S1). When the user of Communication Device 200 powers on CommunicationDevice 200 by utilizing input device 210 (FIG. 1), such as by pressing apower button (S2), CPU 211 scans Start Up Software Index Storage Area20621 c 1 (S3), and identifies the software programs which areautomatically activated (S4). CPU 211 activates the software programsthereafter of which the software program indexes are identified in S4(S5).

As another embodiment, the software programs per se (not the softwareprogram indexes described hereinbefore may be stored in a specificstorage area which are activated by the present function.

As another embodiment, the present function may be implemented at thetime the user of Communication Device 200 logs on instead of at the timethe Communication Device 200 is powered as described in S2 describedhereinbefore.

<<Stereo Audio Data Output Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the stereo audio data outputfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to output audio datafrom Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereo fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host DataStorage Area H00 c of Host H. In this embodiment, Host Data Storage AreaH00 c includes Stereo Audio Information Storage Area H22 a. Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area H22 a stores the software programs and datanecessary to implement the present function as described in detailshereinafter.

This paragraph the storage areas included in Stereo Audio InformationStorage Area H22 a . In this embodiment, Stereo Audio InformationStorage Area H22 a includes Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b andStereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c. Stereo Audio Software Storage AreaH22 b stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the one described hereinafter. Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22 c stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described in hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area H22 c . A plurality of stereo audio data are stored inStereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c. In this embodiment, three stereoaudio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1, Stereo Audio Data H22 c 2,and Stereo Audio Data H22 c 3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area H22 c . This paragraphdescribes the components of Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1 as an example. Inthis embodiment, Stereo Audio Data H22 c 1 includes Left Speaker AudioData H22 c 1L, Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1R, and Stereo Audio DataOutput Timing Data H22 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L is anaudio data which is designed to be output from Speaker 216L. RightSpeaker Audio Data H22 c 1R is an audio data which is designed to beoutput from Speaker 216R. Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data H22 c 1Tis a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the output of bothLeft Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data H22 c 1Rfrom Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of the software program storedin Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 b . In this embodiment, thesoftware program stored in Stereo Audio Software Storage Area H22 bextracts one of the stereo audio data stored in Stereo Audio DataStorage Area H22 c and creates Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD forpurposes of transferring the extracted stereo audio data toCommunication Device 200 (S1).

This paragraph illustrates the components of Transferred Stereo AudioData TSAD created by the software program stored in Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area H22 b . In this embodiment, Transferred StereoAudio Data TSAD is composed of Header TSAD1, Com Device ID TSAD2, HostID TSAD3, Transferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD4, and Footer TSAD5. ComDevice ID TSAD2 indicates the identification of Communication Device200, Host ID TSAD3 indicates the identification of Host H, andTransferred Stereo Audio Data TSAD4 is the stereo audio data extractedin the manner described hereinbefore. Header TSAD1 and Footer TSAD5indicate the beginning and the end of Transferred Stereo Audio DataTSAD.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes StereoAudio Information Storage Area 20622 a. Stereo Audio Information StorageArea 20622 a stores the software programs and data necessary toimplement the present function as described in details hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622 a . In this embodiment, Stereo AudioInformation Storage Area 20622 a includes Stereo Audio Software StorageArea 20622 b and Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c. Stereo AudioSoftware Storage Area 20622 b stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described inhereinafter. Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the stereo audio data stored in Stereo AudioData Storage Area 20622 c . A plurality of stereo audio data are storedin Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c. In this embodiment, threestereo audio data, i.e., Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1, Stereo Audio Data20622 c 2, and Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 3 are stored therein.

This paragraph illustrates the components of the stereo audio datastored in Stereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c . This paragraphdescribes the components of Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 as an example.In this embodiment, Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 includes Left SpeakerAudio Data 20622 c 1L, Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R, and StereoAudio Data Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T. Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c 1L is an audio data which is designed to be output from Speaker 216L.Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R is an audio data which is designedto be output from Speaker 216R. Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data20622 c 1T is a timing data which is utilized to synchronize the outputof both Left Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data20622 c 1R from Speaker 216R and Speaker 216L respectively.

The downloaded stereo audio data are stored in specific area(s) ofStereo Audio Data Storage Area 20622 c .

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of selecting and preparing tooutput the stereo audio data from Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereofashion. In this embodiment, a list of stereo audio data is displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects onestereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2). Assuming Stereo Audio Data 20622 c 1 isselected in S2, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Left Speaker Audio Data 20622c 1L (S3), Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1R (S4), and Stereo AudioData Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T from Stereo Audio Data Storage Area20622 c (S5).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of outputting the stereo audiodata from Speakers 216L and 216R in a stereo fashion. In thisembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a specificsignal to output the stereo audio data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). Assuming Audio Data 20622c 1 is selected in S2 described hereinbefore, CPU 211 outputs LeftSpeaker Audio Data 20622 c 1L and Right Speaker Audio Data 20622 c 1Rfrom Speakers 216L and 216R respectively in a stereo fashion inaccordance with Stereo Audio Data Output Timing Data 20622 c 1T (S2).

<<SOS Calling Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the SOS calling function whichenables Communication Device 200 to notify the police department thecurrent location of Communication Device 200 and the personalinformation of the user of Communication 200 when a 911 call is dialedfrom Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host InformationStorage Area H00 a . Host Information Storage Area H00 a includes SOSCalling Information Storage Area H29 a of which the data stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area H29 a . SOS Calling Information Storage AreaH29 a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b and SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b storesthe data necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter. SOS Calling Software Storage Area H29 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in SOS Calling DataStorage Area H29 b . SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b includes PoliceDepartment Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 of which the data storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Police Department LocationData Storage Area H29 b 1 . Police Department Location Data Storage AreaH29 b 1 includes three columns, i.e., Police Dept ID, Location Data, andPhone #. Police Dept ID represents the identification of a policedepartment (e.g., NYPD). Location Data represents the geographicallocation data (in x, y, z format) of the police department of thecorresponding Police Dept ID. Phone # represents the phone number of thepolice department of the corresponding Police Dept ID. In the presentexample, H29PD #1 is an identification of the police department of whichthe geographical location is H29LD #1 and of which the phone number isH29PN #1; H29PD #2 is an identification of the police department ofwhich the geographical location is H29LD #2 and of which the phonenumber is H29PN #2; H29PD #3 is an identification of the policedepartment of which the geographical location is H29LD #3 and of whichthe phone number is H29PN #3; and H29PD #4 is an identification of thepolice department of which the geographical location is H29LD #4 and ofwhich the phone number is H29PN #4.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200 as describedhereinafter may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. RAM 206 includes SOS Calling InformationStorage Area 20629 a of which the details are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in SOS CallingInformation Storage Area 20629 a . SOS Calling Information Storage Area20629 a includes SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b and SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c. SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 bincludes data necessary to implement the present function, such as theones described hereinafter. SOS Calling Software Storage Area 20629 cstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the one described hereinafter.

This paragraph storage areas included in SOS Calling Data Storage Area20629 b . SOS Calling Data Storage Area 20629 b includes GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 and User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2. GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 stores the data regarding the currentgeographical location produced by the method so-called GPS as describedhereinbefore. User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 stores the data regardingthe personal information of the user of Communication Device 200 asdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area20629 b 2. User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 includes User Data 20629UDwhich includes data regarding the personal information of the user ofCommunication Device 200. In the present example, User Data 20629UDcomprises Name, Age, Sex, Race, Blood Type, Home Address, and SSN. Namerepresents the name of the user of Communication Device 200; Agerepresents the age of the user of Communication Device 200; Sexrepresents the sex of the user of Communication Device 200; Racerepresents the race of the user of Communication Device 200; Blood Typerepresents the blood type of the user of Communication Device 200; HomeAddress represents the home address of the user of Communication Device200; and SSN represents the social security number of the user ofCommunication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area 20629 c . When the user of Communication Device200 inputs 911 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) calculates the GPS data, i.e.,the current geographical location data by utilizing the method so-calledGPS as described hereinbefore (S2), and stores the GPS data in GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 (S3). CPU 211 then retrieves User Data 20629UDfrom User Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 and the GPS data from GPS DataStorage Area 20629 b 1 (S4), and composes SOS Data 20629SOS therefrom(S5), which is sent thereafter to Host H (S6).

This paragraph illustrates the elements of SOS Data 20629SOS. SOS Data20629SOS comprises Connection Request 20629CR, GPS Data 20629GD, andUser Data 20629UD. Connection Request 20629CR represents a request toHost H to forward the 911 call to a police department. GPS Data 20629GDis a data retrieved from GPS Data Storage Area 20629 b 1 as described inS4 described hereinbefore. User Data 20629UD is a data retrieved fromUser Data Storage Area 20629 b 2 as described in S4 describedhereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29 c of Host H . Host H periodically checks theincoming call (S1). If the incoming call is SOS Data 20629SOS (S2), HostH initiates the SOS calling process as described hereinafter (S3).

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in SOS CallingSoftware Storage Area H29 c of Host H. Host H retrieves GPS Data 20629GDfrom SOS Data 20629SOS (S1), and selects the closest police departmentby comparing GPS Data 20629GD and the data stored in column LocationData of Police Department Location Data Storage Area H29 b 1 of Host H(S2). Host H then retrieves the corresponding phone number stored incolumn Phone # and connects the line between the corresponding policedepartment and Communication Device 200 in order to initiate a voicecommunication therebetween (S3). Host H forwards to the policedepartment thereafter GPS Data 20629GD and User Data 20629UD retrievedin S1 (S4).

As another embodiment, User Data 20629UD stored in User Data StorageArea 20629 b 2 may be stored in SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b ofHost H. In this embodiment, SOS Data 20629SOS primarily comprisesConnection Request 20629CR and GPS Data 20629GD, and User Data 20629UDis retrieved from SOS Calling Data Storage Area H29 b of Host H, whichis sent to the police department in S4 described hereinbefore.

<<Audiovisual Playback Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audiovisual playback functionwhich enables Communication Device 200 to playback audiovisual data,such as movies, soap operas, situation comedies, news, and any type ofTV programs.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Audiovisual Playback Information Storage Area 20632 aof which the information stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction may be downloaded to Communication Device 200 from Host H

This paragraph illustrates the data and software programs stored inAudiovisual Playback Information Storage Area 20632 a . AudiovisualPlayback Information Storage Area 20632 a includes Audiovisual PlaybackData Storage Area 20632 b and Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area20632 c. Audiovisual Playback Data Storage Area 20632 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter. Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audiovisual Playback DataStorage Area 20632 b . Audiovisual Playback Data Storage Area 20632 bincludes Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 and Message DataStorage Area 20632 b 2. Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 stores aplurality of audiovisual data described hereinafter. Message DataStorage Area 20632 b 2 stores a plurality of message data describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the audiovisual data stored in AudiovisualData Storage Area 20632 b 1 . Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1stores a plurality of audiovisual data wherein the audiovisual datastored therein in the present example are: Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 a,Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 b, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 c, andAudiovisual Data 20632 b 1 d, all of which are primarily composed ofvideo data and audio data. Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 a is a movie,Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 b is a soap opera, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1c is a situation comedy, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 d is TV news in thepresent embodiment. As another embodiment, Audiovisual Data 20632 b 1 dmay be an audiovisual data taken via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) andMicrophone 215 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Message Data Storage Area20632 b 2 . Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 includes Start MessageText Data 20632 b 2 a, Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b, Pause MessageText Data 20632 b 2 c, Resume Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1, SlowReplay Message Text Data 20632 b 2 d, Forward Message Text Data 20632 b2 e, Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f, Next Message Text Data 20632b 2 g, and Previous Message Text Data 20632 b 2 h. Start Message TextData 20632 b 2 a is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)and which indicates that the playback of an audiovisual data isinitiated. Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process of anaudiovisual data is stopped. Pause Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c is atext data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that theplayback process of an audiovisual data is paused. Resume Message TextData 20632 b 2 c 1 is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 andwhich indicates that the playback process of an audiovisual data isresumed from the point it is paused. Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632b 2 d is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicatesthat the playback process of an audiovisual data is implemented in aslow motion. Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20632 b 2 e is a text datawhich is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audiovisualdata is fast-forwarded. Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f is atext data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that anaudiovisual data is fast-rewinded. Next Message Text Data 20632 b 2 g isa text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that theplayback process of the next audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1 is initiated. Previous Message Text Data 20632 b2 h is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicatesthat the playback process of the previous audiovisual data stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 is initiated.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in AudiovisualPlayback Software Storage Area 20632 c . Audiovisual Playback SoftwareStorage Area 20632 c includes Audiovisual Start Software 20632 c 1,Audiovisual Stop Software 20632 c 2, Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c3, Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 a, Audiovisual Slow ReplaySoftware 20632 c 4, Audiovisual Fast-Forward Software 20632 c 5,Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software 20632 c 6, Audiovisual Next Software20632 c 7, and Audiovisual Previous Software 20632 c 8. AudiovisualStart Software 20632 c 1 is a software program which initiates theplayback process of an audiovisual data. Audiovisual Stop Software 20632c 2 is a software program which stops the playback process of anaudiovisual data. Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3 is a softwareprogram which pauses the playback process of an audiovisual data.Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 a is a software program whichresumes the playback process of the audiovisual data from the point itis paused by Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3. Audiovisual SlowReplay Software 20632 c 4 is a software program which implements theplayback process of an audiovisual data in a slow motion. AudiovisualFast-Forward Software 20632 c 5 is a software program whichfast-forwards an audiovisual data. Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software20632 c 6 is a software program which fast-rewinds an audiovisual data.Audiovisual Next Software 20632 c 7 is a software program whichinitiates the playback process of the next audiovisual data stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1. Audiovisual Previous Software20632 c 8 is a software program which initiates the playback process ofthe previous audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates the messages displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).Eight types of messages are displayed on LCD 201, i.e., ‘Start’, ‘Stop’,‘Pause’, ‘Resume’, ‘Slow Reply’, ‘Fast-Forward’, ‘Fast-Rewind’, ‘Next’,and ‘Previous’. ‘Start’ is Start Message Text Data 20632 b 2 a, ‘Stop’is Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b, ‘Pause’ is Pause Message TextData 20632 b 2 c, ‘Resume’ is Resume Message Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1,‘Slow Reply’ is Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632 b 2 d,‘Fast-Forward’ is Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20632 b 2 e,‘Fast-Rewind’ is Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f, ‘Next’ isNext Message Text Data 20632 b 2 g, ‘Previous’ is Previous Message TextData 20632 b 2 h described in hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Selecting Software 20632 c 9stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c inpreparation of executing the software programs described hereinafter.CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the identifications of the audiovisual datastored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays a list of the identifications on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). Aparticular audiovisual data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3).

The following paragraphs illustrate the software programs stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c . Nine types of inputsignals can be input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, i.e., the audiovisual playback signal, theaudiovisual stop signal, the audiovisual pause signal, the audiovisualresume signal, the audiovisual slow replay signal, the audiovisualfast-forward signal, the audiovisual fast-rewind signal, the audiovisualnext signal, and the audiovisual previous signal. The audiovisualplayback signal indicates to initiate the playback process of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisualstop signal indicates to stop the playback process of the audiovisualdata selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual pause signalindicates to pause the playback process of the audiovisual data selectedin S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual resume signal indicates toresume the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore from the point the audio data is paused. Theaudiovisual slow replay signal indicates to implement the playbackprocess of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore ina slow motion. The audiovisual fast-forward signal indicates tofast-forward the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore.The audiovisual fast-rewind signal indicates to fast-rewind theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audiovisualnext signal indicates to initiate the playback process of the nextaudiovisual data of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore both of which are stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1 . The audiovisual previous signal indicates to initiate theplayback process of the previous audiovisual data of the audiovisualdata selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which are stored inAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Start Software 20632 c 1 storedin Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which initiatesthe playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual playback signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process (i.e., outputs the audiodata from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) and display the video data on LCD 201(FIG. 1)) of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore(S2), and retrieves Start Message Text Data 20632 b 2 a from MessageData Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Stop Software 20632 c 2 stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c ]. The audiovisualstop signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then stops the playbackprocess of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore(S2), and retrieves Stop Message Text Data 20632 b 2 b from Message DataStorage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for aspecified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Pause Software 20632 c 3 storedin Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which pauses theplayback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual pause signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then pauses the playback process of the audiovisual dataselected in S3 decribed hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Pause MessageText Data 20632 b 2 c from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3) When the playback process is paused in S2, the audio data includedin the audiovisual data is refrained from being output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) and a still image composing the video data included in theaudiovisual data is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Resume Software 20632 c 3 astored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichresumes the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3 ofdescribed hereinbefore from the point the audiovisual data is paused inS2 described hereinbefore. The audiovisual resume signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then resumes the playback process of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 of described hereinbefore (S2) from thepoint it is paused in S2 described hereinbefore, and retrieves ResumeMessage Text Data 20632 b 2 c 1 from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3) When the playback process is resumed in S2, the audio data includedin the audiovisual data is resumed to be output from Speaker 216(FIG. 1) and the video data included in the audiovisual data is resumedto be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Slow Replay Software 20632 c 4stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichimplements the playback process of the audiovisual data selected in S3described herein before in a slow motion. The audiovisual slow replaysignal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playbackprocess of the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore ina slow motion (S2), and retrieves Slow Replay Message Text Data 20632 b2 d from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Fast-Forward Software 20632 c 5stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichfast-forwards the audiovisual data selected in S3 of describedhereinbefore. The audiovisual fast-forward signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then fast-forwards the audiovisual data selected in S3described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Fast-Forward Message TextData 20632 b 2 e from Message Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displaysthe data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Fast-Rewind Software 20632 c 6stored in Audiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c whichfast-rewinds the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore.The audiovisual fast-rewind signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-rewinds the audiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore(S2), and retrieves Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20632 b 2 f fromMessage Data Storage Area 20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Next Software 20632 c 7 stored inAudiovisual Playback Software Storage Area 20632 c which initiates theplayback process of the next audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1 . The audiovisual next signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of the nextaudiovisual data of the audiovisual data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore both of which are stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area20632 b 1 b2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specifiedperiod of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audiovisual Previous Software 20632 c 8 is asoftware program which initiates the playback process of the previousaudiovisual data stored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1. Theaudiovisual previous signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) theninitiates the playback process of the previous audiovisual data of theaudiovisual data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20632 b 1 (S2), and retrievesPrevious Message Text Data 20632 b 2 h from Message Data Storage Area20632 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specifiedperiod of time (S3).

As another embodiment, the audiovisual data stored in Audiovisual DataStorage Area 20632 b 1 may be stored in Host H and retrieved therefromwhen the software programs described hereinbefore are executed. In thisembodiment, the audio data is temporarily stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) andis erased from the portion which is playbacked.

<<Audio Playback Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the audio playback function whichenables Communication Device 200 to playback audio data, such as jazzmusic, rock music, classic music, pops music, and any other types ofaudio data.

This paragraph illustrates the information stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Audio Playback Information StorageArea 20633 a of which the information stored therein are describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction may be downloaded to Communication Device 200 from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the data and software programs stored inAudio Playback Information Storage Area 20633 a . In this embodiment,Audio Playback Information Storage Area 20633 a includes Audio PlaybackData Storage Area 20633 b and Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633c. Audio Playback Data Storage Area 20633 b stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Audio Playback DataStorage Area 20633 b . In this embodiment, Audio Playback Data StorageArea 20633 b includes Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 and Message DataStorage Area 20633 b 2. Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 stores aplurality of audio data described in hereinafter. Message Data StorageArea 20633 b 2 stores a plurality of message data described inhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the audio data stored in Audio Data StorageArea 20633 b 1. In this embodiment, Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1stores a plurality of audio data wherein the audio data stored thereinin the present example are: Audio Data 20633 b 1 a, Audio Data 20633 b 1b, Audio Data 20633 b 1 c, and Audio Data 20633 b 1 d, all of which areprimarily composed of video data and audio data. Audio Data 20633 b 1 ais a jazz music, Audio Data 20633 b 1 b is a rock music, Audio Data20633 b 1 c is a classic music, Audio Data 20633 b 1 d is a pops musicin the present embodiment. As another embodiment, Audio Data 20633 b 1 dmay be an audio data taken via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) and Microphone 215(FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Message Data Storage Area20633 b 2. In this embodiment, Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2includes Start Message Text Data 20633 b 2 a, Stop Message Text Data20633 b 2 b, Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 c, Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1, Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 d, ForwardMessage Text Data 20633 b 2 e, Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f,Next Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g, and Previous Message Text Data 20633b 2 h. Start Message Text Data 20633 b 2 a is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) and which indicates that the playback ofan audio data is initiated. Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b is a textdata which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playbackprocess of an audio data is stopped. Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 cis a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates thatthe playback process of an audio data is paused. Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1 is a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 andwhich indicates that the playback process of an audio data is resumedfrom the point it is paused. Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 dis a text data which is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates thatthe playback process of an audio data is implemented in a slow motion.Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e is a text data which isdisplayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audio data isfast-forwarded. Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f is a text datawhich is displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that an audio data isfast-rewinded. Next Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g is a text data whichis displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process ofthe next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 isinitiated. Previous Message Text Data 20633 b 2 h is a text data whichis displayed on LCD 201 and which indicates that the playback process ofthe previous audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 isinitiated.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c . In this embodiment, AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c includes Audio Start Software20633 c 1, Audio Stop Software 20633 c 2, Audio Pause Software 20633 c3, Audio Resume Software 20633 c 3 a, Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c4, Audio Fast-Forward Software 20633 c 5, Audio Fast-Rewind Software20633 c 6, Audio Next Software 20633 c 7, and Audio Previous Software20633 c 8. Audio Start Software 20633 c 1 is a software program whichinitiates the playback process of an audio data. Audio Stop Software20633 c 2 is a software program which stops the playback process of anaudio data. Audio Pause Software 20633 c 3 is a software program whichpauses the playback process of an audio data. Audio Resume Software20633 c 3 a is a software program which resumes the playback process ofthe audio data from the point it is paused by Audio Pause Software 20633c 3. Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c 4 is a software program whichimplements the playback process of an audio data in a slow motion. AudioFast-Forward Software 20633 c 5 is a software program whichfast-forwards an audio data. Audio Fast-Rewind Software 20633 c 6 is asoftware program which fast-rewinds an audio data. Audio Next Software20633 c 7 is a software program which initiates the playback process ofthe next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1. AudioPrevious Software 20633 c 8 is a software program which initiates theplayback process of the previous audio data stored in Audio Data StorageArea 20633 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates the messages displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).In this embodiment, eight types of messages are displayed on LCD 201,i.e., ‘Start’, ‘Stop’, ‘Pause’, ‘Resume’, ‘Slow Reply’, ‘Fast-Forward’,‘Fast-Rewind’, ‘Next’, and ‘Previous’. ‘Start’ is Start Message TextData 20633 b 2 a, ‘Stop’ is Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b, ‘Pause’is Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 c, ‘Resume’ is Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1, ‘Slow Reply’ is Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633b 2 d, ‘Fast-Forward’ is Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e,‘Fast-Rewind’ is Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f, ‘Next’ isNext Message Text Data 20633 b 2 g, ‘Previous’ is Previous Message TextData 20633 b 2 h described hereinbefore.

This paragraph illustrates Audio Selecting Software 20633 c 9 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c in preparation of executingthe software programs described in hereinafter. In this embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the identifications of the audio data stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list ofthe identifications on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). A particular audio data isselected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S3).

This paragraph and the following paragraphs illustrate the softwareprograms stored in Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c . Asdescribed in each drawing figure hereinafter, eight types of inputsignals can be input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, i.e., the audio playback signal, the audio stopsignal, the audio pause signal, the audio resume signal, the audio slowreplay signal, the audio fast-forward signal, the audio fast-rewindsignal, the audio next signal, and the audio previous signal. The audioplayback signal indicates to initiate the playback process of the audiodata selected in S3 of Paragraph [0224]. The audio stop signal indicatesto stop the playback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audio pause signal indicates to pause the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. Theaudio resume signal indicates to resume the playback process of theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore from the point theaudio data is paused. The audio slow replay signal indicates toimplement the playback process of the audio data selected in S3described hereinbefore in a slow motion. The audio fast-forward signalindicates to fast-forward the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. The audio fast-rewind signal indicates to fast-rewind theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. The audio next signalindicates to initiate the playback process of the next audio data of theaudio data selected in S3 of Paragraph both of which are stored in AudioData Storage Area 20633 b 1. The audio previous signal indicates toinitiate the playback process of the previous audio data of the audiodata selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which are stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1.

This paragraph illustrates Audio Start Software 20633 c 1 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which initiates theplayback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, the audio playback signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process (i.e.,outputs the audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1)) of the audio dataselected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Start MessageText Data 20633 b 2 a from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Stop Software 20633 c 2 stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c which stops the playback processof the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, the audio stop signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenstops the playback process of the audio data selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Stop Message Text Data 20633 b 2 b fromMessage Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Pause Software 20633 c 3 stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which pauses the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3. In this embodiment, the audiopause signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then pauses the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2),and retrieves Pause Message Text Data 20633 b 2 c from Message DataStorage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for aspecified period of time (S3) When the playback process is paused in S2,the audio data included in the audio data is refrained from being outputfrom Speaker 216 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Resume Software 20633 c 3 a stored inAudio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which resumes the playbackprocess of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore from thepoint the audiovisual data is paused in S2 described hereinbefore. Inthis embodiment, the audio resume signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then resumes the playback process of the audio data selected inS3 described hereinbefore from the point the audiovisual data is pausedin S2 described hereinbefore (S2), and retrieves Resume Message TextData 20633 b 2 c 1 from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displaysthe data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Slow Replay Software 20633 c 4 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which implements theplayback process of the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbeforein a slow motion. In this embodiment, the audio slow replay signal isinput by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore in a slow motion (S2),and retrieves Slow Replay Message Text Data 20633 b 2 d from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Fast-Forward Software 20633 c 5 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which fast-forwards theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In this embodiment,the audio fast-forward signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-forwards the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2),and retrieves Fast-Forward Message Text Data 20633 b 2 e from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Fast-Rewind Software 20633 c 6 storedin Audio Playback Software Storage Area 20633 c which fast-rewinds theaudio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore. In this embodiment,the audio fast-rewind signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenfast-rewinds the audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore (S2),and retrieves Fast-Rewind Message Text Data 20633 b 2 f from MessageData Storage Area 20633 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)for a specified period of time (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Next Software 20633 c 7 stored in AudioPlayback Software Storage Area 20633 c which initiates the playbackprocess of the next audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b1. In this embodiment, the audio next signal is input by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) then initiates the playback process of the next audio data ofthe audio data selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which arestored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S2), and retrieves NextMessage Text Data 20633 b 2 g from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Audio Previous Software 20633 c 8 is asoftware program which initiates the playback process of the previousaudio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1. In thisembodiment, the audio previous signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) theninitiates the playback process of the previous audio data of the audiodata selected in S3 described hereinbefore both of which are stored inAudio Data Storage Area 20633 b 1 (S2), and retrieves Previous MessageText Data 20633 b 2 h from Message Data Storage Area 20633 b 2 anddisplays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) for a specified period of time(S3).

As another embodiment, the audio data stored in Audio Data Storage Area20633 b 1 may be stored in Host H and retrieved therefrom when thesoftware programs described hereinbefore are executed. In thisembodiment, the audio data is temporarily stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) andis erased from the portion which is playbacked.

<<Digital Camera Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the digital camera function whichenables Communication Device 200 to take digital photos by utilizing CCDUnit 214 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

The data and software programs stored in Digital Camera InformationStorage Area 20646 a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646 a . In this embodiment, Digital CameraInformation Storage Area 20646 a includes Digital Camera Data StorageArea 20646 b and Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c. DigitalCamera Data Storage Area 20646 b stores the data necessary to implementthe present function, such as the ones described hereinafter. DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraData Storage Area 20646 b . In this embodiment, Digital Camera DataStorage Area 20646 b includes Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 andDigital Camera Function Data Storage Area 20646 b 2. Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 stores the data stored hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Photo Data Storage Area20646 b 1. In this embodiment, Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Photo ID’ and ‘Photo Data’. Column ‘PhotoID’ stores the identifications of the photo data, and column ‘PhotoData’ stores a plurality of photo data taken by implementing the presentfunction. In the example described in the present drawing, Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 stores the following data: ‘Photo ID’ Photo #1 ofwhich the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD1; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #2 of which the ‘PhotoData’ is 46PD2; ‘Photo ID’ Photo #3 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD3;‘Photo ID’ Photo #4 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD4; and ‘Photo ID’Photo #5 of which the ‘Photo Data’ is 46PD5.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2. In this embodiment, Digital CameraFunction Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 includes Quality Data Storage Area20646 b 2 a, Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2b, and Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c. Quality Data Storage Area20646 b 2 a stores the data selected in S2 described hereinafter.Multiple Photo Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b stores thedata selected in S2 of Paragraph [0246]. Strobe Data Storage Area 20646b 2 c stores the data selected in S2 described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c . In this embodiment, DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c stores Quality Selecting Software20646 c 1, Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2, Trimming Software20646 c 3, Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4, Strobe Software 20646 c5, Digital Camera Function Selecting Software 20646 c 6, Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7, Strobe On/Off SelectingSoftware 20646 c 8, Photo Data Shooting Software 20646 c 9, and MultiplePhoto Shooting Software 20646 c 10. Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1is the software program described hereinafter. Multiple Photo ShootingSoftware 20646 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter.Trimming Software 20646 c 3 is the software program described inhereinafter. Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Strobe Software 20646 c 5 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Digital Camera Function Selecting Software 20646c 6 is the software program described hereinafter. Multiple PhotoShooting Number Selecting Software 20646 c 7 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Photo Data Shooting Software20646 c 9 is the software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Camera Function Selecting Software20646 c 6 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c whichadministers the overall flow of displaying the functions and selectingthe option for each function. In this embodiment, a list of functions isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The items displayed on LCD 201 are‘Quality’, ‘Multiple Photo’, and ‘Strobe’. A function is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2), and the relevant software program is activated thereafter (S3). Inthe present embodiment, Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 describedin hereinafter is activated when ‘Quality’ displayed on LCD 201 isselected in S2. Multiple Photo Shooting Number Selecting Software 20646c 7 described hereinafter is activated when ‘Multiple Photo’ is selectedin S2. Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8 described inhereinafter is activated when ‘Strobe’ is selected in S2.

This paragraph illustrates Quality Selecting Software 20646 c 1 storedin Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which selects thequality of the photo data taken by implementing the present function. Inthis embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are ‘High’, ‘STD’, and ‘Low’ inthe present embodiment. One of the options is selected by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). Theresolution of the photo data taken is high if ‘High’ is selected; theresolution of the photo taken is standard if ‘STD’ is selected; and theresolution of the photo taken is low if ‘Low’ is selected. The selectedoption is stored as the quality data in Quality Data Storage Area 20646b 2 a (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Number SelectingSoftware 20646 c 7 stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646c which selects the number of photos taken by a single photo shootingsignal. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are figures from ‘1’through ‘10’. Only one photo is taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘1’is selected; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘2’ isselected; three photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘3’ isselected; four photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘4’ isselected; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘5’ isselected; six photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘6’ isselected; seven photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘7’ isselected; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘8’ isselected; nine photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘9’ isselected; and ten photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if ‘10’ isselected. A digit from ‘1’ through ‘10’ is selected by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). The selecteddigital is stored as the multiple photo shooting number data in MultiplePhoto Shooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Strobe On/Off Selecting Software 20646 c 8stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which selectsFlash Light Unit 220 (not shown) to be activated or not when a photo istaken. In this embodiment, a list of options is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The options displayed on LCD 201 are ‘On’ and ‘Off’.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated at the time photo is taken if ‘On’ isselected; and Flash Light Unit 220 is not activated at the time photo istaken if ‘Off’ is selected. One of the two options is selected byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). The selected option is stored as the strobe data in Strobe DataStorage Area 20646 b 2 c (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Photo Data Shooting Software 20646 c 9 storedin Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takes photo(s) inaccordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, aphoto shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). Here, the photo shooting signalindicates CPU 211 (FIG. 1) to input photo data to CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1)and store the data in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1. CPU 211 thenretrieves the quality data from Quality Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 a(S2). The photo data is input via CCD Unit 214 (S3), and the data isstored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 with new photo ID inaccordance with the quality data retrieved in S2 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2stored in Digital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takesphoto(s) in accordance with the options selected hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, a photo shooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the multiple photo shooting number data from Multiple PhotoShooting Number Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 b (S2). CPU 211 then takesphotos in accordance with the multiple photo shooting number dataretrieved in S2 (S3). Namely, only one photo is taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘1’; two photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘2’; three photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘3’; four photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘4’; five photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘5’; six photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘6’; seven photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘7’; eight photos are taken by a photo shooting signal if themultiple photo shooting number data retrieved in S2 is ‘8’; nine photosare taken by a photo shooting signal if the multiple photo shootingnumber data retrieved in S2 is ‘9’; and ten photos are taken by a photoshooting signal if the multiple photo shooting number data retrieved inS2 is ‘10’.

This paragraph illustrates Strobe Software 20646 c 5 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c which takes photo(s) in accordancewith the options selected hereinbefore. In this embodiment, a photoshooting signal is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the strobedata from Strobe Data Storage Area 20646 b 2 c (S2). If the strobe datais ‘On’ (S3), CPU 211 activates Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown) eachtime a photo is taken (S4). In other words, Strobe Software 20646 c 5 isharmonized with Multiple Photo Shooting Software 20646 c 2 describedhereinbefore. Namely, Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for one time ifone photo is taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit220 is activated for two times if two photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for three times ifthree photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash LightUnit 220 is activated for four times if four photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for fivetimes if five photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal. FlashLight Unit 220 is activated for six times if six photos are taken by asingle photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated forseven times if seven photos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for eight times if eight photos aretaken by a single photo shooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 isactivated for nine times if nine photos are taken by a single photoshooting signal. Flash Light Unit 220 is activated for ten times if tenphotos are taken by a single photo shooting signal.

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the zooming function whichzooms the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1-. Inthis embodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Assuming that the userintends to zoom Object 206460 bj, the object displayed on LCD 201, to alarger size. The user selects Area 46ARa which includes Object 206460 bjby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,and the selected area is zoomed to fit the size of LCD 201. The zoomedphoto is replaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the zooming function described in Paragraph [0251]. Acertain photo data selected by the user of Communication Device 200 isstored in Area 20646ARa of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data isas same as that of Area 20646ARa. In this embodiment, Display Area20646DA is the area which is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Area 46ARais the area which is selected by the user of Communication Device 200.Object 206460 bj is the object included in the photo data. Area 46ARawhich includes Object 206460 bj is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data storedin Area 20646ARa is zoomed to the size in which the size of Area 46ARaequals to that of Display Area 20646DA. The zoomed photo data isreplaced with the original photo data and stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1. The portion of the photo data which does not fit Area20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Digital Zooming Software 20646 c 4 stored inDigital Camera Software Storage Area 20646 c which implements theoperation described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays a list of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored inPhoto Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). Acertain photo data is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S2), and the selected photo data isdisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Area 46ARadescribed in hereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 orvia voice recognition system (S4). When a zooming signal is input byutilizing Input Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211(FIG. 1) implements the process described hereinbefore and replaces theoriginal photo data with the zoomed photo data, which is stored in PhotoData Storage Area 20646 b 1 (S6).

This paragraph illustrates one embodiment of the trimming function whichtrims the photo data stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1 andthereby moves the selected object to the center of the photo data. Inthis embodiment, a certain photo selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200 is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Point 20646PTa adjacent toObject 206460 bj is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system, and the photo is centered at Point20646PTa. The trimmed photo is replaced with the original photo.

This paragraph illustrates the operation performed in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)to implement the trimming function described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, Display Area 20646DA is the portion of the photo data whichis displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). Object 206460 bj is the objectincluded in the photo data. Point 20646PTa is the point selected by theuser of Communication Device 200 adjacent to Object 206460 bj which iscentered by the present function. In this embodiment, a certain photodata selected by the user of Communication Device 200 is stored in Area20646ARb of RAM 206. Here, the size of the photo data is as same as thatof Area 20646ARb. Point 20646PTa is selected by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, and the photo data iscentered at Point 20646PTa by sliding the entire photo data to theright. The trimmed photo data is replaced with the original photo dataand stored in Photo Data Storage Area 20646 b 1. The portion of thephoto data which does not fit Area 20646ARa is cropped.

This paragraph illustrates Trimming Software 20646 c 3 stored in DigitalCamera Software Storage Area 20646 c which implements the operationdescribed in hereinbefore. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysa list of the photo IDs representing the photo data stored in Photo DataStorage Area 20646 b 1 as well as the thumbnails (S1). A certain photodata is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S2), and the selected photo data is displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) as described hereinbefore (S3). Point 20646PTa describedhereinbefore is selected by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S4). When a trimming signal is input by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5), CPU 211 (FIG. 1)centers the photo data at Point 20646PTa and replaces the original photodata with the trimmed photo data, which is stored in Photo Data StorageArea 20646 b 1 (S6).

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple language displayingfunction wherein a language is selected from a plurality of languages,such as English, Japanese, French, and German, which is utilized tooperate Communication Device 200.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206 includes Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654 a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 a . In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654 aincludes Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b andMultiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c. MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b stores the data necessaryto implement the present function, such as the ones described inhereinafter. Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cstores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleLanguage Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 b . In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654 bincludes Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1, Language Type DataStorage Area 20654 b 2, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3, andSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4. Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 stores the data described herinafter.Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 storesthe language table ID selected in S4 s described hereinafter. Thisparagraph illustrates the storage areas included in Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1. In the present embodiment, Language TablesStorage Area 20654 b 1 includes Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1a, Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b, Language Table#3 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c, and Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d.Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 bla stores the data described inhereinafter. Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c storesthe data described hereinafter. Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a . In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 a comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data.

Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, and eachlanguage text data represents the English text data displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b 1 a stores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’and the corresponding language text data ‘Open file’; the language itemID ‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Closefile’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Delete’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Copy’; the language item ID‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cut’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘Insert’; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘File’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘View’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Format’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Window’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Help’; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘MyNetwork’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Save’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘No’; and the language item ID‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b . In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 b comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Japanesetext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b stores the following data: thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Open file’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#2’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Close file’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Delete’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Copy’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language text datameaning ‘Paste’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ andthe corresponding language text data meaning ‘Insert’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘File’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Edit’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘View’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Tools’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Window’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘MyNetwork’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Save’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘No’in Japanese; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c . In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 c comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Frenchtext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c stores the following data: thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘French#1’ meaning ‘Open file’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#2’meaning ‘Close file’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’and the corresponding language text data ‘French#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#6’ meaning‘Paste’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#8’ meaning ‘File’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#9’meaning ‘Edit’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#10’ meaning ‘View’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#11’ meaning ‘Format’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#13’ meaning‘Window’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ in French; the language itemID ‘Language Item#16’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#17’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#17’ meaning‘Local Disk’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#20’meaning ‘No’ in French; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ inFrench.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 d . In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654 b 1 d comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Text Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language text data. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores thelanguage text data, and each language text data represents the Germantext data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment,Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d stores the following data: thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘German#1’ meaning ‘Open file’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#2’meaning ‘Close file’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’and the corresponding language text data ‘German#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#5’ meaning ‘Cut’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#6’ meaning‘Paste’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#8’ meaning ‘File’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#9’meaning ‘Edit’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#10’ meaning ‘View’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#11’ meaning ‘Format’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#13’ meaning‘Window’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#15’ meaning ‘My Network’ in German; the language itemID ‘Language Item#16’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#17’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#17’ meaning‘Local Disk’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#19’ meaning ‘Yes’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#20’meaning ‘No’ in German; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ inGerman.

This paragraph illustrates data stored in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2 (Paragraph [0262]). In the present embodiment, LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘LanguageTable ID’ and ‘Language Type Data’. Column ‘Language Table ID’ storesthe language table ID, and each language table ID represents theidentification of the storage areas included in Language Tables StorageArea 20654 b 1 . Column ‘Language Type Data’ stores the language typedata, and each language type data represents the type of the languageutilized in the language table of the corresponding language table ID.In the present embodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654 b 2stores the following data: the language table ID ‘Language Table#1’ andthe corresponding language type data ‘English’; the language table ID‘Language Table#2’ and the corresponding language type data ‘Japanese’;the language table ID ‘Language Table#3’ and the corresponding languagetype data ‘French’; and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘German’. Here, the language table ID‘Language Table#1’ is an identification of Language Table#1 Storage Area20654 b 1 a ; the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ is anidentification of Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b ; thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#3’ is an identification of LanguageTable#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c ; and the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#4’ is an identification of Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1d .

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Language Item Data StorageArea 20654 b 3. In the present embodiment, Language Item Data StorageArea 20654 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and‘Language Item Data’. Column ‘Language Item ID’ stores the language itemIDs, and each language item ID represents the identification of thecorresponding language item data. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores thelanguage item data, and each language item data represents the contentand/or the meaning of the language text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654 b 3stores the following data: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Open file’; the language item ID‘Language Item#2’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Close file’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Delete’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Cut’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the corresponding language item data‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘File’; the language item ID‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Edit’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘View’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Format’; the language item ID‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Tools’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Window’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Help’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language item data ‘My Network’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Save’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘No’; and the language item ID‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Cancel’.Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language Item Data’ are same asthe ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ of Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a .

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c . In the presentembodiment, Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cstores Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1, Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2, Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 a, Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654 c 3 b, and Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4. Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1is the software program described hereinafter. Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654 c 2 is the software program describedhereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor20654 c 3 a is the software program described hereinafter. Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Explorer 20654 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing English>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘English’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#1) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., English). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table#1) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b1 a in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘File’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#9’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 bla and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Edit’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘View’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Format’at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Tools’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S6).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding languagetext data ‘Window’ at the predetermined location in the word processor(S7). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Help’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the word processor byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemthereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph. Thisparagraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software For WordProcessor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime a word processor is closed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates the closing process ofthe word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to close the word processor (S1). Inthe process of closing the word processor, the following steps of S2through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language itemID ‘Language Item#18’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Save’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Yes’ atthe predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘No’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the corresponding languagetext data ‘Cancel’ at the predetermined location in the word processor(S5). The save signal indicating to save the alphanumeric data input inS9 described hereinbefore is input by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, assuming that the user ofCommunication Device 200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data aresaved in a predetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The wordprocessor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the steps ofS2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 aand displays the corresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 a and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’ at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654 b 1 aand displays the corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’ at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing Japanese>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘Japanese’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#2) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 (i.e.,Japanese). In the present embodiment, when Communication Device 200 ispowered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesthe selected language table ID (Language Table#2) from Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies thestorage area corresponding to the language table ID selected in S2(Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b in Language Tables StorageArea 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text data displaying process is initiatedthereafter of which the details are described hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘File’ in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 band displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Edit’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘View’ in Japanese at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Format’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Tools’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b anddisplays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Window’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding languagetext data indicating ‘Help’ in Japanese at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Save’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Yes’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text data indicating‘No’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the word processor(S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ inLanguage Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘Cancel’ in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to savethe alphanumeric data input in S9 described hereinbefore is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘My Network’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654 b 1 b and displays the corresponding language text data indicating‘Trash’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654 b 1 band displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘LocalDisk’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorerlike software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing French>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘French’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#3) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., French). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table#3) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b1 c ) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ inLanguage Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#8’ indicating ‘File’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#9’indicating ‘Edit’ in French at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#10’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘French#10’ indicating ‘View’ in Frenchat the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#11’ indicating ‘Format’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 cand displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#12’ indicating‘Tools’ in French at the predetermined location in the word processor(S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ inLanguage Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#13’ indicating ‘Window’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654 b 1 c ) and displays the corresponding language text data‘French#14’ indicating ‘Help’ in French at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described hereinbefore is primarilycomposed of Menu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIAwherein the language text data described in S2 through S8 describedhereinbefore are displayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data areinput in Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the presentembodiment, 20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language textdata processed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the languagetext data processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#18’ indicating ‘Save’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 cand displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ indicating‘Yes’ in French at the predetermined location in the word processor(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ inLanguage Table#3 Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#20’ indicating ‘No’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language text data‘French#21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in French at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to save thealphanumeric data input in S9 described hereinbefore is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a isclosed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composedof 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForExplorer 20654 c 4 stored in Multiple Language Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data at the time aWindows Explorer like software program which displays folders and/ordirectories and the structures thereof is executed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executesWindows Explorer like software program in response to the signal inputby the user of Communication Device 200 indicating to activate andexecute the software program (S1). In the process of displaying theWindows Explorer like software program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#15’ indicating ‘My Network’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#16’ indicating ‘Trash’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654 b 1 c and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#17’ indicating ‘Local Disk’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous Paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing German>>

This paragraph illustrates Language Selecting Software 20654 c 1 storedin Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichselects the language utilized to operate Communication Device 200 from aplurality of languages. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the language type data from LanguageType Data Storage Area 20654 b 2 (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘German’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654 b 2, and stores the language table ID (Language Table#4) inSelected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b 4 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Selected Language Displaying Software 20654 c2 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 cwhich displays and operates with the language selected in S3 describedhereinbefore (i.e., German). In the present embodiment, whenCommunication Device 200 is powered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves the selected language table ID(Language Table#4) from Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654 b4 (S2). CPU 211 then identifies the storage area corresponding to thelanguage table ID selected in S2 (Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b1 d ) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654 b 1 (S3). Language text datadisplaying process is initiated thereafter of which the details aredescribed hereinafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 a stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays the language text data atthe time a word processor, such as MS Word and WordPerfect is executed.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200executes a word processor in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of displaying the word processor on LCD201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 through S8 are implemented.Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ inLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#8’ indicating ‘File’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#9’indicating ‘Edit’ in German at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#10’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘German#10’ indicating ‘View’ in Germanat the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German#11’ indicating ‘Format’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 dand displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#12’ indicating‘Tools’ in German at the predetermined location in the word processor(S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ inLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#13’ indicating ‘Window’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language text data‘German#14’ indicating ‘Help’ in German at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a is implemented. In the presentembodiment, the word processor described in is primarily composed ofMenu Bar 20154MB and Alphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein thelanguage text data described in S2 through S8 described hereinbefore aredisplayed on Menu Bar 20154MB and alphanumeric data are input inAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA. In the present embodiment,20154MBF is the language text data processed in S2 of the previousparagraph; 20154MBE is the language text data processed in S3 of theprevious paragraph; 20154MBV is the language text data processed in S4of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is the language text data processedin S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBT is the language text dataprocessed in S6 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBW is the language textdata processed in S7 of the previous paragraph; and 20154MBH is thelanguage text data processed in S8 of the previous paragraph.

This paragraph illustrates Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654 c 3 b stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654 c which displays a prompt on LCD 201(FIG. 1) at the time a word processor is closed. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 initiates theclosing process of the word processor in response to the signal input bythe user of Communication Device 200 indicating to close the wordprocessor (S1). In the process of closing the word processor, thefollowing steps of S2 through S5 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German#18’ indicating ‘Save’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 dand displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ indicating‘Yes’ in German at the predetermined location in the word processor(S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ inLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#20’ indicating ‘No’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654 b 1 d and displays the corresponding language text data‘German#21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in German at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to save thealphanumeric data input in S9 described hereinbefore is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Word Processor 20654 c 3 b is implemented. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the timeLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654 c 3 a )is closed. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarilycomposed of 20154PrS, 20154PrY, 20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the presentembodiment, 20154PrS is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; 20154PrY is the language text data processed in S3of the previous paragraph; 20154PrN is the language text data processedin S4 of the previous paragraph; and 20154PrC is the language text dataprocessed in S5 of the previous paragraph. This paragraph illustratesLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 stored inMultiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654 c whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 throughS4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘German#15’ indicating ‘MyNetwork’ in German at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorerlike software program (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1 d anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘German#16’ indicating‘Trash’ in German at the predetermined location in the Windows Explorerlike software program (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654 b 1anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘German#17’ indicating‘Local Disk’ in German at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates the data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654 c 4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at thetime Language Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654 c 4 isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD is the language text dataprocessed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MN is the language textdata processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; and 20154Tr is thelanguage text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph.

<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing Other Languages>>

For the avoidance of doubt, the present function is not limited toselect a language, to operate Communication Device 200, only from theforegoing four languages of English, Japanese, French, and German. Thepresent function is also capable to select a language from Dutch,Chinese, Arabic, Korean, Spanish, Italian, and any other languagesexisting in this world, in addition to the foregoing four languages.

<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the Caller's Information displayingfunction which displays the Information regarding the caller (e.g.,name, phone number, email address, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201(FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

The first set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device, a CommunicationDevice 200, utilized by the caller.

The second set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data andsoftware programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device, aCommunication Device 200, utilized by the callee.

The third set of paragraphs hereinafter illustrate the data and softwareprograms stored in Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, RAM 206 of Caller'sDevice includes Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655 a . In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 a includes Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b and Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c.Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter. Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Caller'sDevice, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 b. In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bincludes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4, Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5, Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7,Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8, and Work Area 20655 b 9.Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3 stores the data described hereinafter. Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the data described hereinafter.Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 stores the caller'scalculated GPS data which represents the current geographic location ofCaller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6 stores the callee's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Callee's Device in (x, y,z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7 stores the map datarepresenting the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecaller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9 is astorage area utilized to perform calculation and to temporarily storedata.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1. In the present embodiment,Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 includes Caller's AudioData Storage Area 20655 b 1 a and Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 1 b. Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 a stores thecaller's audio data which represents the audio data input via Microphone215 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b 1 b stores the caller's visual data which represents the visual datainput via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2. In the present embodiment,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 includes Callee's AudioData Storage Area 20655 b 2 a and Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 2 b. Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a stores thecallee's audio data which represents the audio data sent from Callee'sDevice. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 b stores thecallee's visual data which represents the visual data sent from Callee'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3. In the present embodiment, Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Caller'sPersonal Data’ and ‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’. Column‘Caller's Personal Data’ stores the caller's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the caller. Column ‘Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Flag’ stores the permitted caller's personal data flag andeach permitted caller's personal data flag represents whether thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device. The permitted caller's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding caller's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding caller'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3stores the following data: the caller's name and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's phone number andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's email address and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘1’; the caller's home address and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's business address and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'stitle and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’;the caller's hobby and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’; the caller's blood type and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's gender and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sage and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; andcaller's date of birth and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4. In the present embodiment, Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the callee's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the callee which are displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Callee'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 stores the callee's name and phonenumber.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c . In the presentembodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores Permitted Caller's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655 c 1,Dialing Software 20655 c 2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c 3, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4, Caller's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655 c 5, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6, Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 a, Permitted Callee's Personal DataDisplaying Software 20655 c 7, Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8,Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9, and Callee's VisualData Displaying Software 20655 c 10. Permitted Caller's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1 is the software program describedhereinafter. Dialing Software 20655 c 2 is the software programdescribed in hereinafter. Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c3 is the software program described hereinafter. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4 is the software program describedhereinafter. Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5 isthe software program described in hereinafter. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 ais the software program described in hereinafter. Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7 is the software programdescribed in hereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8 is thesoftware program described in hereinafter. Callee's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655 c 9 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655 c 10 is thesoftware program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206A(FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, RAM 206A ofCallee's Device includes Callee's Information Displaying InformationStorage Area 20655 aA of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655 aA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655 aA includes Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area20655 bA and Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA. Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA storesthe data necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCallee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter. Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Callee's Device, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655 bAincludes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A, Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A, Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A, Caller's Map Data StorageArea 20655 b 7A, Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A, and WorkArea 20655 b 9A. Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1Astores the data described hereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2A stores the data described hereinafter. Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the data described hereinafter.Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4A stores the data describedhereinafter. Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A storesthe caller's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Caller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 6A stores the callee's calculated GPS datawhich represents the current geographic location of Callee's Device in(x, y, z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A stores themap data representing the surrounding area of the location indicated bythe caller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b8A stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area 20655 b 9A is astorage area utilized to perform calculation and to temporarily storedata.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A. In the present embodiment,Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1A includes Caller'sAudio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA and Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 bA. Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA storesthe caller's audio data which represents the audio data sent fromCaller's Device in a wireless fashion. Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655 b 1 bA stores the caller's visual data which represents the visualdata input sent from Caller's Device in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Callee'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A. In the present embodiment,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2A includes Callee'sAudio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA and Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 bA. Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 aA storesthe callee's audio data which represents the audio data input viaMicrophone 215 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 2 bA stores the callee's visual data which represents thevisual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3A. In the present embodiment, Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the caller's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the caller which are displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Caller'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A stores the caller's name, phonenumber, email address, and home address.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4A. In the present embodiment, Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655 b 4A comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Callee'sPersonal Data’ and ‘Permitted Callee's Personal Data Flag’. Column‘Callee's Personal Data’ stores the callee's personal data whichrepresent the personal data of the callee. Column ‘Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Flag’ stores the permitted callee's personal data flag andeach permitted callee's personal data flag represents whether thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. The permitted callee's personal data flag isrepresented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that the corresponding callee'spersonal data is not permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4Astores the following data: callee's name and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee's phone number and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee'semail address and the corresponding permitted caller's personal dataflag ‘0’; the callee's home address and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's business address and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'stitle and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’;the callee's hobby and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’; the callee's blood type and the corresponding permittedcallee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'sage and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; andcallee's date of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA. In the presentembodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA stores Permitted Callee's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655 c1A, Dialing Software 20655 c 2A, Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software20655 c 3A, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A, Callee'sAudiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5A, Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A, Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aA, Permitted Caller's PersonalData Displaying Software 20655 c 7A, Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A,Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655 c 9A, and Caller's VisualData Displaying Software 20655 c 10A. Permitted Callee's Personal DataSelecting Software 20655 c 1A is the software program describedhereinafter. Dialing Software 20655 c 2A is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3Ais the software program described hereinafter. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655 c 5A isthe software program described hereinafter. Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6A is the software program describedhereinafter. Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6aA is the software program described hereinafter. Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655 c 7A is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Caller's Audio Data OutputtingSoftware 20655 c 9A is the software program described hereinafter.Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655 c 10A is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host H. In thepresent embodiment, Host H includes Caller/Callee Information StorageArea H55 a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55 a. In the present embodiment, Caller/CalleeInformation Storage Area H55 a includes Caller/Callee Data Storage AreaH55 b and Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c. Caller/Callee DataStorage Area H55 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Caller/CalleeData Storage Area H55 b. In the present embodiment, Caller/Callee DataStorage Area H55 b includes Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1,Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2, Map Data Storage Area H55 b3, Work Area h55 b 4, Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5,and Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6. Caller'sInformation Storage Area H55 b 1 stores the Caller's Informationreceived Caller's Device. Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2stores the Callee's Information received Callee's Device. Map DataStorage Area H55 b 3 stores the map data received from Caller's Deviceand Callee's Device. Work Area H55 b 4 is a storage area utilized toperform calculation and to temporarily store data. Caller's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 stores the callee'scalculated GPS data.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55 c . In the present embodiment, Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55 c stores Dialing Software H55 c 2, Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3, Callee's Device Pin-pointingSoftware H55 c 3 a, Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4,Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6, and Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 a. Dialing Software H55 c2 is the software program described hereinafter. Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3 a is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter. Caller'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 6 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving SoftwareH55 c 6 a is the software program described hereinafter.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCaller's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Callee'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655 c 1 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which selects the permittedcaller's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves all of the caller's personal data from Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 3 (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55 c 2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H, Dialing Software20655 c 2 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2A storedin Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA ofCallee's Device, which enables to connect between Caller's Device andCallee's Device via Host H in a wireless fashion. In the presentembodiment, a connection is established between Caller's Device and HostH (S1). Next, a connection is established between Host H and Callee'sDevice (S2). As a result, Caller's Device and Callee's Device are ableto exchange audiovisual data, text data, and various types of data witheach other. The connection is maintained until Caller's Device, Host H,or Callee's Device terminates the connection.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H andCaller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device,which identifies the current geographic location of Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects theGPS raw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPSdata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host Hproduces the caller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPSdata (S4). Host H stores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 5 (S5). Host H then retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea H55 b 5 (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7). Uponreceiving the caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211stores the data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5(S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized to producethe caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller's calculated GPS datais the data representing the location of Caller's Device in (x, y, z)format. The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Caller'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the rawGPS data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecaller's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5 (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which sendsand receives the map data. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device retrieves the caller's calculated GPS data fromCaller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 (S1), and sends thedata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the calculated GPS data fromCaller's Device (S3), Host H identifies the map data in Map Data StorageArea H55 b 3 (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area ofthe location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host Hretrieves the map data from Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (S5), andsends the data to Caller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map data fromHost H (S7), Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655 b 7 (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655 c 5 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, which collects the audiovisual data ofthe caller to be sent to Callee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the caller'saudiovisual data from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 thenstores the caller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b 1 a (S2), and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655 b 1 b (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device and Host H. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrievesthe permitted caller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3 (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's calculated GPS datafrom Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5 (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7(S3). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 a (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the caller's visualdata from Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 b (S5). CPU 211then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined asthe ‘Caller's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receivingthe Caller's Information from Caller's Device (S7), Host H stores theCaller's Information in Caller's Information Storage Area H55 b 1 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c ofHost H and Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6 aAstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cof Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller's Informationbetween Host H and Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, Host Hretrieves the Caller's Information from Caller's Information StorageArea H55 b 1 (S1), and sends the Caller's Information to Callee's Device(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device receives the Caller'sInformation from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted caller'spersonal data in Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 3A (S4).CPU 211 stores the caller's calculated GPS data in Caller's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 5A (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (S6). CPU 211 stores thecaller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA(S7). CPU 211 stores the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 1 bA (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Caller's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 7A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which displays the permittedcaller's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves thepermitted caller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 3A (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA ofCallee's Device, which displays the map representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrievesthe caller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 5A (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data fromCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 7A (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the caller's current location icon in accordance with the caller'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the caller's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Caller's Device in the map data.The map with the caller's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c 9A stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655 c of Caller's Device, which outputs the caller's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's audio data fromCaller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 aA (S1). CPU 211 then outputsthe caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software20655 c 10A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which displays the caller's visualdata on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment,CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller's visual datafrom Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 1 bA (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays the caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

The following paragraphs primarily illustrate the sequence to output theCallee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) from Caller'sDevice.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data SelectingSoftware 20655 c 1A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which selects the permittedcallee's personal data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves all of the callee's personal data from Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655 b 4A (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software H55 c 2 stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H, Dialing Software20655 c 2A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655 c 2 storedin Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c ofCaller's Device, which enables to connect between Callee's Device andCaller's Device via Host H in a wireless fashion. In the presentembodiment, a connection is established between Callee's Device and HostH (S1). Next, a connection is established between Host H and Caller'sDevice (S2). As a result, Callee's Device and Caller's Device are ableto exchange audiovisual data, text data, and various types of data witheach other. The sequence described in the present paragraph is notnecessarily implemented if the connection between Caller's Device andCallee's Device is established as described hereinbefore. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph may be implemented if the connectionis accidentally terminated by Callee's Device and the connection processis initiated by Callee's Device.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55 c 3a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H andCallee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee'sDevice, which identifies the current geographic location of Callee'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Devicecollects the GPS raw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211sends the raw GPS data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data(S3), Host H produces the callee's calculated GPS data by referring tothe raw GPS data (S4). Host H stores the callee's calculated GPS data inCallee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 (Paragraph [0333])(S5). Host H then retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data fromCallee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55 b 6 (S6), and sends thedata to Callee's Device (S7). Upon receiving the callee's calculated GPSdata from Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores the data in Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A (S9). Here, the GPS raw data are theprimitive data utilized to produce the callee's calculated GPS data, andthe callee's calculated GPS data is the data representing the locationof Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of the sequence describedhereinbefore in which the entire process is performed solely by Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655 c 3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the rawGPS data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces thecallee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), andstores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6A (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55 c 4stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 c of Host H and MapData Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 4A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cA of Callee'sDevice, which sends and receives the map data. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b 6A (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving thecalculated GPS data from Callee's Device (S3), Host H identifies the mapdata in Map Data Storage Area H55 b 3 (S4). Here, the map datarepresents the surrounding area of the location indicated by thecallee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrieves the map data from MapData Storage Area H55 b 3 (S5), and sends the data to Callee's Device(S6). Upon receiving the map data from Host H (S7), Callee's Devicestores the data in Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A (S8). Thesequence described in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software20655 c 5A stored in Callee's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 cA of Callee's Device, which collects the audiovisual data ofthe callee to be sent to Caller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1)thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the callee'saudiovisual data from CCD Unit 214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 thenstores the callee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b 2 aA (S2), and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 bA (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 cof Host H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 cAof Callee's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Information(which is defined hereinafter) between Callee's Device and Host H. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrievesthe permitted callee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 4A (S1). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655 b 6A (S2). CPU 211retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8A(S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 aA (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's visualdata from Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 bA (S5). CPU 211then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined asthe ‘Callee's Information’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receivingthe Callee's Information from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores theCallee's Information in Callee's Information Storage Area H55 b 2 (S8).The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55 c 6 a stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55 cof Host H and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655 c 6a stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee's Informationbetween Host H and Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, Host Hretrieves the Callee's Information from Callee's Information StorageArea H55 b 2 (S1), and sends the Callee's Information to Caller's Device(S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device receives the Callee'sInformation from Host H (S3). CPU 211 stores the permitted callee'spersonal data in Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655 b 4 (S4). CPU211 stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655 b 6 (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCallee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8 (S6). CPU 211 stores thecallee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a(S7). CPU 211 stores the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual DataStorage Area 20655 b 2 b (S8). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Permitted Callee's Personal Data DisplayingSoftware 20655 c 7 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655 c of Caller's Device, which displays the permittedcallee's personal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves thepermitted callee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data StorageArea 20655 b 4 (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Map Displaying Software 20655 c 8 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655 c ofCaller's Device, which displays the map representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Inthe present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrievesthe callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655 b 6 (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map data fromCallee's Map Data Storage Area 20655 b 8 (S2), and arranges on the mapdata the callee's current location icon in accordance with the callee'scalculated GPS data (S3). Here, the callee's current location icon is anicon which represents the location of Callee's Device in the map data.The map with the callee's current location icon is displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S4). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c 9 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655 c of Caller's Device, which outputs the callee's audio data fromSpeaker 216 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's audio data fromCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 a (S1). CPU 211 then outputsthe caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

This paragraph illustrates Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software20655 c 10 stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software StorageArea 20655 c of Caller's Device, which displays the callee's visual dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee's visual data fromCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655 b 2 b (S1). CPU 211 thendisplays the callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

<<Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web)>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the communication device remotecontrolling function (by web) which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to remotely control Communication Device 200 by an ordinarypersonal computer (Personal Computer PC) via the Internet, i.e., byaccessing a certain web site. Here, Personal Computer PC may be any typeof personal computer, including a desktop computer, lap top computer,and PDA.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thepresent embodiment, Host H includes Communication Device ControllingInformation Storage Area H58 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area H58 a . In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Information Storage AreaH58 a includes Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 band Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter. Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H58 c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function on the side of Host H, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b . In the present embodiment,Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58 b includesPassword Data Storage Area H58 b 1, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b2, Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3, and Work Area H58 b 4.Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1 stores the data describedhereinafter. Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 stores thedata described hereinafter. Work Area H58 b 4 is utilized as a work areato perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage AreaH58 b 1. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘UserID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents the identificationof the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ storesthe password data, and each password data represents the password set bythe user of the corresponding user ID. Here, each password data iscomposed of alphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, Password DataStorage Area H58 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ andthe corresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#2’; the user ID‘User#3’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#3’; the userID ‘User#4’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#4’; andthe user ID ‘User#5’ and the corresponding password data ‘PasswordData#5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea H58 b 2. In the present embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage AreaH58 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID represents theidentification of the user of Communication Device 200. Column ‘PhoneNumber Data’ stores the phone number data, and each phone number datarepresents the phone number of the user of the corresponding user ID.Here, each phone number data is composed of numeric data. In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ and the corresponding phonenumber data ‘Phone Number Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’ and thecorresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#3’; the user ID‘User#4’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#4’;and the user ID ‘User#5’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘PhoneNumber Data#5’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Web Display Data StorageArea H58 b 3 (Paragraph [0365]). In the present embodiment, Web DisplayData Storage Area H58 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Web Display ID’and ‘Web Display Data’. Column ‘Web Display ID’ stores the web displayIDs, and each web display ID represents the identification of the webdisplay data stored in column ‘Web Display Data’. Column ‘Web DisplayData’ stores the web display data, and each web display data representsa message displayed on Personal Computer PC. In the present embodiment,Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 stores the following data: the webdisplay ID ‘Web Display#0’ and the corresponding web display data ‘WebDisplay Data#0’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#1’ and thecorresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#1’; the web display ID‘Web Display#2’ and the corresponding web display data ‘Web DisplayData#2’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#3’ and the corresponding webdisplay data ‘Web Display Data#3’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#4’and the corresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#4’; the webdisplay ID ‘Web Display#5’ and the corresponding web display data ‘WebDisplay Data#5’; and the web display ID ‘Web Display#6’ and thecorresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#6’. ‘Web DisplayData#0’ represents the message: ‘To deactivate manner mode, press 1. Todeactivate manner mode and ring your mobile phone, press 2. To ring yourmobile phone, press 3. To change password of your mobile phone, press 4.To lock your mobile phone, press 5. To power off your mobile phone,press 6’. ‘Web Display Data#1’ represents the message: ‘The manner modehas been deactivated.’ ‘Web Display Data#2’ represents the message: ‘Themanner mode has been deactivated and your mobile phone has been rung.’‘Web Display Data#3’ represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has beenrung.’ ‘Web Display Data#4’ represents the message: ‘The password ofyour mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Web Display Data#5’ represents themessage: ‘Your mobile phone has been changed.’ ‘Web Display Data#6’represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has been power-offed. Thisparagraph illustrates the display of Personal Computer PC. In thepresent embodiment, Home Page 20158HP, i.e., a home page to implementthe present function is displayed on Personal Computer PC. Home Page20158HP is primarily composed of Web Display Data#0 and six buttons,i.e., Buttons 1 through 6. Following the instruction described in WebDisplay Data#0, the user may select one of the buttons to implement thedesired function as described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c . In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 cstores User Authenticating Software H58 c 1, Menu Introducing SoftwareH58 c 2, Line Connecting Software H58 c 3, Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware H58 c 4, Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5,Ringing Software H58 c 6, Password Changing Software H58 c 7, DeviceLocking Software H58 c 8, and Power Off Software H58 c 9. UserAuthenticating Software H58 c 1 is the software program describedhereinafter. Menu Introducing Software H58 c 2 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Line Connecting Software H58 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58 c 4is the software program described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating& Ringing Software H58 c 5 is the software program describedhereinafter. Ringing Software H58 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Password Changing Software H58 c 7 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Device Locking Software H58 c 8 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Power Off Software H58 c 9 is thesoftware program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206 includes Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20658 a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area 20658 a . In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20658 a includes Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area20658 b and Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c. Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described hereinafter.Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Communication Device 200, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area 20658 a may be downloaded from HostH.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in CommunicationDevice Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 b . In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658 bincludes Password Data Storage Area 20658 b 1 and Work Area 20658 b 4.Password Data Storage Area 20658 b 1 stores the data describedhereinafter. Work Area 20658 b 4 is utilized as a work area to performcalculation and to temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Password Data Storage Area20658 b 1. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area 20658 b1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column‘User ID’ stores the user ID which represents the identification of theuser of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores thepassword data set by the user of Communication Device 200. Here, thepassword data is composed of alphanumeric data. Assuming that the userID of Communication Device 200 is ‘User#1’. In the present embodiment,Password Data Storage Area H58 b 1 stores the following data: the userID ‘User#1’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Number Data StorageArea 20658 b 2. In the present embodiment, Phone Number Data StorageArea 20658 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone NumberData’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID of the user of CommunicationDevice 200. Column ‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phone number datawhich represents the phone number of Communication Device 200. Here, thephone number data is composed of numeric data. In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the corresponding phone number data‘Phone Number Data#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c . In the presentembodiment, Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c stores Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3, Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware 20658 c 4, Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c5, Ringing Software 20658 c 6, Password Changing Software 20658 c 7,Device Locking Software 20658 c 8, and Power Off Software 20658 c 9.Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware 20658 c 5 is the software program described hereinafter.Ringing Software 20658 c 6 is the software program describedhereinafter. Password Changing Software 20658 c 7 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Device Locking Software 20658 c 8 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Power Off Software 20658 c 9 isthe software program described hereinafter.

The following paragraphs illustrate the software programs which enablesthe user of Communication Device 200 to remotely control CommunicationDevice 200 by Personal Computer PC.

This paragraph illustrates User Authenticating Software H58 c 1 storedin Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of HostH, which authenticates the user of Communication Device 200 to implementthe present function via Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Personal Computer PC sends an access request to Host H viathe Internet (S1). Upon receiving the request from Personal Computer PC(S2) and the line is connected therebetween (S3), the user, by utilizingPersonal Computer PC, inputs both his/her password data (S4) and thephone number data of Communication Device 200 (S5). Host H initiates theauthentication process by referring to Password Data Storage Area H58 b1 and Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2 (S6). The authenticationprocess is completed (and the sequences described hereafter are enabledthereafter) if the password data and the phone number data described inS4 and S5 match with the data stored in Password Data Storage Area H58 b1 and Phone Number Data Storage Area H58 b 2.

This paragraph illustrates Menu Introducing Software H58 c 2 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host H,which introduces the menu on Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Host H retrieves Web Display Data#0 from Web Display DataStorage Area H58 b 3 (S1), and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S2). Upon receiving Web Display Data#0 from Host H (S3), PersonalComputer PC displays Web Display Data#0 on its display (S4). The userselects from one of the buttons of ‘1’ through ‘6’ wherein the sequencesimplemented thereafter are described hereinafter (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Line Connecting Software H58 c 3 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Line Connecting Software 20658 c 3 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which connect line between Host H and Communication Device 200. In thepresent embodiment, Host H calls Communication Device 200 by retrievingthe corresponding phone number data from Phone Number Data Storage AreaH58 b 2 (S1). Upon Communication Device 200 receiving the call from HostH (S2), the line is connected therebetween (S3). For the avoidance ofdoubt, the line is connected between Host H and Communication Device 200merely to implement the present function, and a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58 c 4stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 cof Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658 c 4 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658 c ofCommunication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200. Here, Communication Device 200 activatesVibrator 217 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is in the mannermode and outputs a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) whenCommunication Device 200 is not in the manner mode, upon receiving anincoming call. Assume that the user selects button ‘1’ displayed onPersonal Computer PC (S1). In response, Personal Computer PC sends thecorresponding signal to Host H via the Internet (S2). Host H, uponreceiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner mode deactivatingcommand to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the manner modedeactivating command from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200deactivates the manner mode (S5). Host H retrieves Web Display Data#1from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data#1 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7). Normally the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification tothe user that Communication Device 200 has received an incoming call,and a voice communication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call.In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c 5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter.

This paragraph illustrates Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing SoftwareH58 c 5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage AreaH58 c of Host H and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c5 stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c of Communication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200 and outputs a ringing sound thereafter. Assumethat the user selects button ‘2’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1).In response, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to HostH via the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a manner mode deactivating & device ringing command toCommunication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the manner modedeactivating & device ringing command from Host H (S4), CommunicationDevice 200 deactivates the manner mode (S5) and outputs a ring data fromSpeaker 216 (S6). Host H retrieves Web Display Data#2 from Web DisplayData Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S7). Upon receiving Web Display Data#2 from Host H, Personal ComputerPC displays the data (S8). Normally the purpose to output the ringingsound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification to the user thatCommunication Device 200 has received an incoming call, and a voicecommunication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call. Incontrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H58 c 5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658 c 5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter byimplementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates Ringing Software H58 c 6 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Ringing Software 20658 c 6 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which output a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Assume that theuser selects button ‘3’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a device ringing command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S5). HostH retrieves Web Display Data#3 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving WebDisplay Data#3 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).Normally the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is togive a notification to the user that Communication Device 200 hasreceived an incoming call, and a voice communication is enabledthereafter upon answering the call. In contrast, the purpose to outputthe ringing sound from Speaker 216 by executing Ringing Software H58 c 6and Ringing Software 20658 c 6 is merely to let the user to identify thelocation of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voice communicationbetween human beings is not enabled thereafter by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates Password Changing Software H58 c 7 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Password Changing Software 20658 c 7 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which change the password necessary to operate Communication Device 200.Assume that the user selects button ‘4’ displayed on Personal ComputerPC (S1). In response, Personal Computer PC sends the correspondingsignal to Host H via the Internet (S2). The user then enters a newpassword data by utilizing Personal Computer PC (S3), which is sent toCommunication Device 200 by Host H (S4). Upon receiving the new passworddata from Host H (S5), Communication Device 200 stores the new passworddata in Password Data Storage Area 20658 b 1 and the old password datais erased (S6). Host H retrieves Web Display Data#4 from Web DisplayData Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data to Personal Computer PC(S7). Upon receiving Web Display Data#4 from Host H, Personal ComputerPC displays the data (S8).

This paragraph illustrates Device Locking Software H58 c 8 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Device Locking Software 20658 c 8 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which lock Communication Device 200, i.e., nullify any input signalinput via Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). Assume that the user selects button‘5’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). In response, PersonalComputer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host H via the Internet(S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a devicelocking command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving thedevice locking command from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200 islocked thereafter, i.e., any input via Input Device 210 is nullifiedunless a password data matching to the one stored in Password DataStorage Area 20658 b 1 is entered (S5). Host H retrieves Web DisplayData#5 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data#5 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Power Off Software H58 c 9 stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58 c of Host Hand Power Off Software 20658 c 9 stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658 c of Communication Device 200,which turn off the power of Communication Device 200. Assume that theuser selects button ‘6’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a power off command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Uponreceiving the power off command from Host H (S4), Communication Device200 turns off the power of itself (S5). Host H retrieves Web DisplayData#6 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58 b 3 and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data#6 from HostH, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

The following paragraphs illustrate the shortcut icon displayingfunction which displays one or more of shortcut icons on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. The user of Communication Device200 can execute the software programs in a convenient manner byselecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) the shortcut icons. Theforegoing software programs may be any software programs described inthis specification.

This paragraph illustrates the shortcut icons displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 by implementing the presentfunction. In this embodiment, three shortcut icons are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1), i.e., Shortcut Icon#1, Shortcut Icon#2, and ShortcutIcon#3. The user of Communication Device 200 can execute the softwareprograms by selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) one of theshortcut icons. For example, assume that Shortcut Icon#1 represents MSWord 97. By selecting (e.g., clicking or double clicking) ShortcutIcon#1, the user can execute MS Word 97 installed in CommunicationDevice 200 or Host H. Three shortcut icons are illustrated in thepresent drawing, however, only for purposes of simplifying theexplanation of the present function. Therefore, as many shortcut iconsequivalent to the number of the software programs described in thisspecification may be displayed on LCD 201, and the correspondingsoftware programs may be executed by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes Shortcut Icon DisplayingInformation Storage Area 20659 a of which the data and the softwareprograms stored therein are described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area 20659 a . In this embodiment,Shortcut Icon Displaying Information Storage Area 20659 a includesShortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area 20659 b and Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c. Shortcut Icon Displaying DataStorage Area 20659 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction, such as the ones described hereinafter. Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659 b . In this embodiment, Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area 20659 b includes Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1, Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b2, Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3, and Selected ShortcutIcon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4. Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659 b 1 stores the data described hereinafter. Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter.Shortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 stores the data describedhereinafter. Selected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 storesthe data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image DataStorage Area 20659 b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’and ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores theshortcut icon IDs, and each shortcut icon ID is the identification ofthe corresponding shortcut icon image data stored in column ‘ShortcutIcon Image Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data’ stores the shortcuticon image data, and each shortcut icon image data is the image data ofthe shortcut icon displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) as describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Image Data Storage Area20659 b 1 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID ‘ShortcutIcon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut IconImage Data#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon image data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#2’; theshortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcut iconimage data ‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon image data‘Shortcut Icon Image Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon LocationData Storage Area 20659 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut IconID’ and ‘Shortcut Icon Location Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ storesthe shortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data’ stores the shortcut icon location data, and each shortcuticon location data indicates the location displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)in (x,y) format of the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Location DataStorage Area 20659 b 2 stores the following data: the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon location data‘Shortcut Icon Location Data#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’and the corresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut IconLocation Data#2’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#3’; and the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and thecorresponding shortcut icon location data ‘Shortcut Icon LocationData#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Shortcut Icon ID’and ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data’. Column ‘Shortcut Icon ID’ stores theshortcut icon IDs described hereinbefore. Column ‘Shortcut Icon LinkData’ stores the shortcut icon link data, and each shortcut icon linkdata represents the location in Communication Device 200 of the softwareprogram stored therein represented by the shortcut icon of thecorresponding shortcut icon ID. In this embodiment, Shortcut Icon LinkData Storage Area 20659 b 3 stores the following data: the shortcut iconID ‘Shortcut Icon#1’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#1’; the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#2’ andthe corresponding shortcut icon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#2’;the shortcut icon ID ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ and the corresponding shortcuticon link data ‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#3’; and the shortcut icon ID‘Shortcut Icon#4’ and the corresponding shortcut icon link data‘Shortcut Icon Link Data#4’. The foregoing software program may be anysoftware program described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659 b 4. In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut IconData Storage Area 20659 b 4 stores one or more of shortcut icon IDs.Only the shortcut icon image data of the shortcut icon IDs stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Selected Shortcut Icon Data StorageArea 20659 b 4 stores the following data: the shortcut icon IDs‘Shortcut Icon#1’, ‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon#3’, which meansthat only the shortcut icon image data corresponding to ‘ShortcutIcon#1’, ‘Shortcut Icon#2’, and ‘Shortcut Icon#3’ are displayed on LCD201.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area 20659 c . In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c stores Shortcut IconDisplaying Software 20659 c 1, Software Executing Software 20659 c 2,Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software 20659 c 3, and SoftwareExecuting Software 20659 c 4. Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659 c1 is the software program described hereinafter. Software ExecutingSoftware 20659 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter.Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software 20659 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Software Executing Software 20659 c 4 isthe software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Displaying Software 20659 c 1stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c ofCommunication Device 200, which displays the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In thisembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) refers to the shortcut icon IDs stored inSelected Shortcut Icon Data Storage Area 20659 b 4 to identify theshortcut icon image data to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). CPU211 then retrieves the shortcut icon image data of the correspondingshortcut icon IDs identified in S1 from Shortcut Icon Image Data StorageArea 20659 b 1 (S2). CPU 211 further retrieves the shortcut iconlocation data of the corresponding shortcut icon IDs identified in S1from Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (S3). CPU 211displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) the shortcut icon image data thereafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software 20659 c 2 storedin Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659 c ofCommunication Device 200, which executes the corresponding softwareprogram upon selecting the shortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayedon LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcuticon ID of the shortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). CPU 211identifies the shortcut icon link data stored in Shortcut Icon Link DataStorage Area 20659 b 3 from the shortcut icon ID identified in S2 (S3),and executes the corresponding software program (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Shortcut Icon Location Data Changing Software20659 c 3 stored in Shortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area 20659c of Communication Device 200, which enables the user of CommunicationDevice 200 to change the location of the shortcut icon image datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the shortcut icon image data displayedon LCD 201 (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) then identifies the shortcut icon IDof the shortcut icon image data selected in S1 (S2). The user moves theshortcut icon selected in S1 by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the newlocation thereof (S4), and updates the shortcut icon location datastored in Shortcut Icon Location Data Storage Area 20659 b 2 (S5).

<<Shortcut Icon Displaying Function—Executing Software In Host H>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the implementation of the presentinvention wherein the user of Communication Device 200 executes thesoftware programs stored in Host H (Paragraph [0025]) by selecting theshortcut icons displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Shortcut Icon Displaying Information StorageArea H59 a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Information Storage Area H59 a . In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Information Storage Area H59 a includes Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b and Shortcut Icon Displaying SoftwareStorage Area H59 c. Shortcut Icon Displaying Data Storage Area H59 bstores the data necessary to implement the present function on the sideof Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter. Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area H59 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b . In this embodiment, Shortcut IconDisplaying Data Storage Area H59 b includes Software Programs StorageArea H59 b 1. Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Software Programs StorageArea H59 b 1. In this embodiment, Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Software ID’ and ‘Software Program’.Column ‘Software ID’ stores the software IDs, and each software ID is anidentification of the software program stored in column ‘SoftwareProgram’. Column ‘Software Program’ stores the software programs. Inthis embodiment, Software Programs Storage Area H59 b 1 stores thefollowing data: software ID ‘Software#3’ and the corresponding softwareprogram ‘Software Program#3’; software ID ‘Software#4’ and thecorresponding software program ‘Software Program#4’; software ID‘Software#5’ and the corresponding software program ‘SoftwareProgram#5’; and software ID ‘Software#6’ and the corresponding softwareprogram ‘Software Program#6’. Here, the software programs may be anysoftware programs which are stored in Host H described in thisspecification. As another embodiment, the software programs may be anysoftware programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200described in this specification.

This paragraph illustrates the software program stored in Shortcut IconDisplaying Software Storage Area H59 c . In this embodiment, ShortcutIcon Displaying Software Storage Area H59 c stores Software ExecutingSoftware H59 c 4. Software Executing Software H59 c 4 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Software Executing Software H59 c 4 stored inShortcut Icon Displaying Software Storage Area H59 c of Host H andSoftware Executing Software 20659 c 4 stored in Shortcut Icon DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20659 c of Communication Device 200, which executethe corresponding software program upon selecting the shortcut iconimage data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. Inthis embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 selects theshortcut icon image data displayed on LCD 201 by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenidentifies the shortcut icon ID of the shortcut icon image data selectedin S1 (S2). CPU 211 identifies the shortcut icon link data stored inShortcut Icon Link Data Storage Area 20659 b 3 from the shortcut icon IDidentified in S2 (S3), which is sent to Host H (S4). Upon receiving theshortcut icon link data from Communication Device 200 (S5), Host Hexecutes the corresponding software program (S6) and produces therelevant display data, which are send to Communication Device 200 (S7).Upon receiving the relevant display data from Host H, CommunicationDevice 200 displays the data on LCD 201 (S8).

<<Multiple Channel Processing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple channel processingfunction which enables Communication Device 200 to send and receive alarge amount of data in a short period of time by increasing the uploadand download speed.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Host H. In thisembodiment, Host H includes Multiple Channel Processing InformationStorage Area H61 a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described hereinafter. Here, Host H is a base station whichcommunicates with Communication Device 200 in a wireless fashion.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Information Storage Area H61 a . In this embodimentMultiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area H61 a includesMultiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b and Multiple ChannelProcessing Software Storage Area H61 c. Multiple Channel Processing DataStorage Area H61 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Host H, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b . In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area H61 b includes User DataStorage Area H61 b 1, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2, and SignalType Data Storage Area H61 b 3. User Data Storage Area H61 b 1 storesthe data described hereinafter. Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2stores the data described hereinafter. Signal Type Data Storage Area H61b 3 stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area H61b 1. In this embodiment, User Data Storage Area H61 b 1 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘User Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores theuser IDs, and each user ID in an identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘User Data’ stores the user data, andeach user data represents the personal data of the user of thecorresponding user ID, such as name, home address, office address, phonenumber, email address, fax number, age, sex, credit card number of theuser of the corresponding user ID. In this embodiment, User Data StorageArea H61 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data#3’; and the user ID ‘User#4’ and thecorresponding user data ‘User Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Channel Number StorageArea H61 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’. Column ‘ChannelID’ stores the channel IDs, and each channel ID is an identification ofthe channel which is assigned to each Communication Device 200 andthrough which Host H and Communication Device 200 send and receive data.Normally one channel ID is assigned to one user ID. Column ‘User ID’stores the user IDs described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 stores the following data: the channel ID‘Channel#1’ and the user ID ‘User#1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ with nocorresponding user ID stored; the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ and the user ID‘User#3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’ and the user ID ‘User#4’. Here,the foregoing data indicates that, to communicate with Host H, thechannel ID ‘Channel#1’ is utilized by Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User#1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ is notutilized by any Communication Device 200 (i.e., vacant); the channel ID‘Channel#3’ is utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by theuser ID ‘User#3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’ is utilized byCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#4’.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number StorageArea H61 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’.Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDs described hereinbefore. In thisembodiment, Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 stores the followingdata: the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ and the user ID ‘User#1’; the channelID ‘Channel#2’ and the user ID ‘User#1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ andthe user ID ‘User#3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’ and the user ID‘User#4’. Here, the foregoing data indicates that, to communicate withHost H, the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is utilized by Communication Device200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ isalso utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID‘User#1’; the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ is utilized by Communication Device200 represented by the user ID ‘User#3’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’is utilized by Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID‘User#4’. In sum, the foregoing data indicates that two channel IDs,i.e., ‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel#2’ are utilized by one CommunicationDevice 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Signal Type Data StorageArea H61 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘Signal Type Data’. Column‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore. Column‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, and each signal typedata indicates the type of signal utilized for the channel representedby the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area H61 b 3 stores the following data: the channel ID‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’; thechannel ID ‘Channel#2’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’; the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ and the corresponding signal typedata ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’ and the correspondingsignal type data ‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicates that thechannel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is assigned to thesignal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channel identified by the channel ID‘Channel#2’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channelidentified by the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ is assigned to the signal typedata ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#4’is assigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. Assuming thatCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’ utilizesthe channels represented by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel#2’as described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User#1’ utilizes the signal type data‘cdma2000’ for the channels represented by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’and ‘Channel#2’ for communicating with Host H.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in SignalType Data Storage Area H61 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area H61 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘Signal Type Data’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, andeach signal type data indicates the type of signal utilized for thechannel represented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment,Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 stores the following data: thechannel ID ‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’; the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ and the corresponding signal typedata ‘W-CDMA’; the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ and the corresponding signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#4’ and the correspondingsignal type data ‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicates that thechannel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is assigned to thesignal type data ‘cdma2000’; the channel identified by the channel ID‘Channel#2’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘W-CDMA’; the channelidentified by the channel ID ‘Channel#3’ is assigned to the signal typedata ‘W-CDMA’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#4’is assigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. Assuming thatCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’ utilizesthe channels represented by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel#2’as described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User#1’ utilizes the signal type data in ahybrid manner for communicating with Host H, i.e., the signal type data‘cdma2000’ for ‘Channel#1’ and the signal type data ‘W-CDMA’ for‘Channel#2’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in MultipleChannel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c . In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area H61 c stores SignalType Data Detecting Software H61 c 1, User ID Identifying Software H61 c2, Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 2 a, Channel Number AddingSoftware H61 c 3, Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a, Signal TypeData Adding Software H61 c 4, and Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c4 a. Signal Type Data Detecting Software H61 c 1 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. User ID Identifying Software H61 c 2 is thesoftware program described in hereinafter. Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H61 c 2 a is the software program described hereinafter.Channel Number Adding Software H61 c 3 is the software program describedhereinafter. Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Signal Type Data Adding Software H61 c 4is the software program described hereinafter. Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H61 c 4 a is the software program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment, RAM 206 includesMultiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 a of whichthe data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 a . In thisembodiment, Multiple Channel Processing Information Storage Area 20661 aincludes Multiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b andMultiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c. MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b stores the data necessaryto implement the present function on the side of Communication Device200-, such as the ones described hereinafter. Multiple ChannelProcessing Software Storage Area 20661 c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of CommunicationDevice 200, such as the ones described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Multiple ChannelProcessing Software Storage Area 20661 c may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in MultipleChannel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b . In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Data Storage Area 20661 b includes User DataStorage Area 20661 b 1, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2, andSignal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3. User Data Storage Area 20661 b1 stores the data described hereinafter. Channel Number Storage Area20661 b 2 stores the data described hereinafter. Signal Type DataStorage Area 20661 b 3 stores the data described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Data Storage Area20661 b 1. In this embodiment, User Data Storage Area 20661 b 1comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘User Data’. Column ‘User ID’stores the user ID which is an identification of Communication Device200. Column ‘User Data’ stores the user data represents the personaldata of the user of Communication Device 200, such as name, homeaddress, office address, phone number, email address, fax number, age,sex, credit card number of the user. In this embodiment, User DataStorage Area 20661 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’and the corresponding user data ‘User Data#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Channel Number StorageArea 20661 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘User ID’. Column‘Channel ID’ stores the channel ID which is an identification of thechannel through which Host H and Communication Device 200 send andreceive data. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID describedhereinbefore. In this embodiment, Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2stores the following data: the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ and thecorresponding user ID ‘User#1’. The foregoing data indicates that, tocommunicate with Host H, the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is utilized byCommunication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in ChannelNumber Storage Area 20661 b 2. In this embodiment, Channel NumberStorage Area 20661 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘User ID’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs, and each channelID is an identification of the channel through which Host H andCommunication Device 200 send and receive data. Column ‘User ID’ storesthe user ID described hereinbefore. In this embodiment, Channel NumberStorage Area 20661 b 2 stores the following data: the channel ID‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding user ID ‘User#1’; and the channel ID‘Channel#2’ and the corresponding user ID ‘User#2’. The foregoing dataindicates that, to communicate with Host H, the channel IDs of‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel#2’ are utilized by Communication Device 200represented by the user ID ‘User#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Signal Type Data StorageArea 20661 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and ‘Signal Type Data’.Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs described hereinbefore.Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, and each signaltype data indicates the type of signal utilized for the channelrepresented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment, SignalType Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 stores the following data: the channelID ‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding signal type data ‘cdma2000’; andthe channel ID ‘Channel#2’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’. The foregoing data indicates that the channel identified bythe channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is assigned to the signal type data‘cdma2000’; and the channel identified by the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ isassigned to the signal type data ‘cdma2000’. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’ utilizesthe signal type data ‘cdma2000’ for the channels represented by thechannel ID ‘Channel#1’ and ‘Channel#2’ for communicating with Host H.

This paragraph illustrates another example of the data stored in SignalType Data Storage Area 20661 b 3. In this embodiment, Signal Type DataStorage Area 20661 b 3 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Channel ID’ and‘Signal Type Data’. Column ‘Channel ID’ stores the channel IDs describedhereinbefore. Column ‘Signal Type Data’ stores the signal type data, andeach signal type data indicates the type of signal utilized for thechannel represented by the corresponding channel ID. In this embodiment,Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 stores the following data: thechannel ID ‘Channel#1’ and the corresponding signal type data‘cdma2000’; and the channel ID ‘Channel#2’ and the corresponding signaltype data ‘W-CDMA’. The foregoing data indicates that the channelidentified by the channel ID ‘Channel#1’ is assigned to the signal typedata ‘cdma2000’; and the channel identified by the channel ID‘Channel#2’ is assigned to the signal type data ‘W-CDMA’. In thisembodiment, Communication Device 200 represented by the user ID ‘User#1’utilizes the signal type data in a hybrid manner for communicating withHost H, i.e., the signal type data ‘cdma2000’ for ‘Channel#1’ and thesignal type data ‘W-CDMA’ for ‘Channel#2’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in MultipleChannel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c . In this embodiment,Multiple Channel Processing Software Storage Area 20661 c stores SignalType Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1, User ID Identifying Software20661 c 2, Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a, Channel NumberAdding Software 20661 c 3, Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a,Signal Type Data Adding Software 20661 c 4, and Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20661 c 4 a. Signal Type Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1 isthe software program described hereinafter. User ID Identifying Software20661 c 2 is the software program described hereinafter. DataSending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a is the software program describedhereinafter. Channel Number Adding Software 20661 c 3 is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3a is the software program described hereinafter. Signal Type Data AddingSoftware 20661 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter. DataSending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a is the software program describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Signal Type Data Detecting Software H61 c 1of Host H and Signal Type Data Detecting Software 20661 c 1 ofCommunication Device 200, which detect the signal type utilized for thecommunication between Host H and Communication Device 200 from anysignal type categorized as 2G, 3G, and 4G. The detection of the signaltype is implemented by Host H in the present embodiment. In thisembodiment, Host H detects the signal type (S1), and stores the signaltype data in Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 at the defaultchannel number (in the present example, Channel#1) (S2). Host H thensends the signal type data to Communication Device 200 (S3). Uponreceiving the signal type data from Host H (S4), Communication Device200 stores the signal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b3 at the default channel number (in the present example, Channel#1)(S5).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Signal Type DataDetecting Software H61 c 1 of Host H and Signal Type Data DetectingSoftware 20661 c 1 of Communication Device 200, which detect the signaltype utilized for the communication between Host H and CommunicationDevice 200 from any signal type categorized as 2G, 3G, and 4G. Thedetection of the signal type is implemented by Communication Device 200in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 detects the signal type (S1), and stores thesignal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 at thedefault channel number (in the present example, Channel#1) (S2). CPU 211then sends the signal type data to Host H (S3). Upon receiving thesignal type data from Communication Device 200 (S4), Host H stores thesignal type data in Signal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 at the defaultchannel number (in the present example, Channel#1) (S5).

This paragraph illustrates User ID Identifying Software H61 c 2 of HostH and User ID Identifying Software 20661 c 2 of Communication Device200, which identify the user ID of the corresponding CommunicationDevice 200. In this embodiment, Communication Device 200 sends the userID to Host H (S1). Upon receiving the User ID from Communication Device200 (S2), Host H identifies the default channel number (in the presentexample, Channel#1) for Communication Device 200 (S3), and stores theUser ID in Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 at the channel numberidentified in S3 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 2 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 2 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200. Inthis embodiment, Host H retrieves the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel#1) from Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2(S1), and sends data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) toCommunication Device 200 through the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel#1) retrieved in S1 (S2). Communication Device200 receives the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data)from Host H through the same channel number (S3).

This paragraph illustrates another embodiment of Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware H61 c 2 a of Host H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c2 a of Communication Device 200 by which Communication Device 200 sendsdata (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) to Host H. In thisembodiment, Communication Device 200 retrieves the default channelnumber (in the present example, Channel#1) from Channel Number StorageArea 20661 b 2 (S1), and sends data (e.g., audiovisual data andalphanumeric data) to Host H through the default channel number (in thepresent example, Channel#1) retrieved in S1 (S2). Host H receives thedata (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumeric data) from CommunicationDevice 200 through the same channel number (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Channel Number Adding Software H61 c 3 ofHost H and Channel Number Adding Software 20661 c 3 of CommunicationDevice 200, which add another channel to increase the download and/orupload speed of Communication Device 200. In this embodiment,Communication Device 200 sends a channel number adding request to Host H(S1). Upon receiving the channel number adding request fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H checks the availability in thesame signal type data (S3). Assuming that vacancy is found in the samesignal type data, Host H selects a new channel number (in the presentexample, Channel#2) from the available channel numbers for CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Host H stores the user ID of Communication Device 200in Channel Number Storage Area H61 b 2 at new channel number (in thepresent example, Channel#2) selected in S4 (S5). Host H then sends thenew channel number (in the present example, Channel#2) selected in S4 toCommunication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving the new channel number (inthe present example, Channel#2) from Host H (S7), Communication Device200 stores the new channel number (in the present example, Channel#2) inChannel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S8). As another embodiment,instead of Host H adding a new channel number by receiving a channelnumber adding request from Communication Device 200, Host H may do so inits own initiative.

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200 byincreasing the download speed. In this embodiment, Host H retrieves thechannel numbers (in the present example, Channel#1 and #2) from ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 of the corresponding user ID (in the presentexample, User#1) (S1). Host H splits the data (e.g., audiovisual dataand alphanumeric data) to be sent to Communication Device 200 to theFirst Data and the Second Data (S2). Host H sends the First Data toCommunication Device 200 through Channel#1 (S3), and sends the SecondData to Communication Device 200 through Channel#2 (S4). CommunicationDevice 200 receives the First Data from Host H through Channel#1 (S5),and receives the Second Data from Host H through Channel#2 (S6).Communication Device 200 merges the First Data and the Second Datathereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 3 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 3 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Communication Device 200 sends data to Host H byincreasing the upload speed. In this embodiment, Communication Device200 retrieves the channel numbers (in the present example, Channels #1and #2) from Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S1). CommunicationDevice 200 splits the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumericdata) to be sent to Host H to the Third Data and the Fourth Data (S2).Communication Device 200 sends the Third Data to Host H throughChannel#1 (S3), and sends the Fourth Data to Host H through Channel#2(S4). Host H receives the Third Data from Communication Device 200through Channel#1 (S5), and receives the Fourth Data from CommunicationDevice 200 through Channel#2 (S6). Host H merges the Third Data and theFourth Data thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Signal Type Data Adding Software H61 c 4 ofHost H and Signal Type Data Adding Software 20661 c 4 of CommunicationDevice 200, which add new channel in different signal type if noavailable channel is found in the same signal type in S3. In thisembodiment, Host H checks the availability in other signal type data(S1). Assuming that an available new channel is found in W-CDMA. Host Hselects a new channel number (in the present example, Channel#2) InSignal Type Data Storage Area H61 b 3 for Communication Device 200 (S2).Host H stores the user ID (in the present example, User#1) in ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 (Paragraph [0417]) at new channel numberselected in S2 (in the present example, Channel#2) (S3). Host H storesthe signal type data (in the present example, W-CDMA) in Signal TypeData Storage Area H61 b 3 at new channel number selected in S2 (in thepresent example, Channel#2) (S4). Host H sends the new channel number(in the present example, Channel#2) and the new signal type data (in thepresent example, W-CDMA) to Communication Device 200 (S5). CommunicationDevice 200 receives the new channel number (in the present example,Channel#2) and the new signal type data (in the present example, W-CDMA)from Host H (S6). Communication Device 200 stores the new channel number(in the present example, Channel#2) in Channel Number Storage Area 20661b 2 (S7). Communication Device 200 (in the present example, W-CDMA) inSignal Type Data Storage Area 20661 b 3 (S8).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 4 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Host H sends data to Communication Device 200 byincreasing the download speed. In this embodiment, Host H retrieves thechannel numbers (in the present example, Channel#1 and #2) from ChannelNumber Storage Area H61 b 2 of the corresponding user ID (in the presentexample, User#1) (S1). Host H splits the data (e.g., audiovisual dataand alphanumeric data) to be sent to Communication Device 200 to theFirst Data and the Second Data (S2). Host H sends the First Data toCommunication Device 200 through Channel#1 in cdma2000 (S3), and sendsthe Second Data to Communication Device 200 through Channel#2 in W-CDMA(S4). Communication Device 200 receives the First Data from Host Hthrough Channel#1 in cdma2000 (S5), and receives the Second Data fromHost H through Channel#2 in W-CDMA (S6). Communication Device 200 mergesthe First Data and the Second Data thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Data Sending/Receiving Software H61 c 4 a ofHost H and Data Sending/Receiving Software 20661 c 4 a of CommunicationDevice 200 by which Communication Device 200 sends data to Host H byincreasing the upload speed. In this embodiment, Communication Device200 retrieves the channel numbers (in the present example, Channel#1 and#2) from Channel Number Storage Area 20661 b 2 (S1). CommunicationDevice 200 splits the data (e.g., audiovisual data and alphanumericdata) to be sent to Host H to the Third Data and the Fourth Data (S2).Communication Device 200 sends the Third Data to Host H throughChannel#1 in cdma2000 (S3), and sends the Fourth Data to Host H throughChannel#2 in W-CDMA (S4). Host H receives the Third Data fromCommunication Device 200 through Channel#1 in cdma2000 (S5), andreceives the Fourth Data from Communication Device 200 through Channel#2in W-CDMA (S6). Host H merges the Third Data and the Fourth Datathereafter (S7).

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing other sets of combination of the signals, such as the 2Gsignal and the 3G signal. In order to implement this embodiment, theterm ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘2G’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘3G’ in the explanation set out hereinbefore for purposesof implementing the present embodiment. Here, the 2G signal may be ofany type of signal categorized as 2G, including, but not limited tocdmaOne, GSM, and D-AMPS; the 3G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 3G, including, but not limited to cdma2000, W-CDMA, andTDS-CDMA.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing other sets of combination of the signals, such as the 3Gsignal and the 4G signal. In order to implement this embodiment, theterm ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘3G’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘4G’ in the explanation set out hereinbefore for purposesof implementing the present embodiment. Here, the 3G signal may be ofany type of signal categorized as 3G, including, but not limited tocdma2000, W-CDMA, and TDS-CDMA, and the 4G signal may be of any type ofsignal categorized as 4G.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the first type of 4G signal and the second type of 4G signal.In order to implement this embodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ issubstituted by ‘the first type of 4G signal’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘the second type of 4G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the first type of 4G signaland the second type of 4G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 4G.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the 2G signal and the 3G signal. In order to implement thisembodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ is substituted by ‘the 2G signal’ andthe term ‘W-CDMA’ is substituted by ‘the 3G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the 2G signal may be of anytype of signal categorized as 2G, including, but not limited to cdmaOne,GSM, and D-AMPS, and the 3G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 3G, including, but not limited to cdma2000, W-CDMA, andTDS-CDMA.

As another embodiment, the present function may be utilized forprocessing the first type of 2G signal and the second type of 2G signal.In order to implement this embodiment, the term ‘cdma2000’ issubstituted by ‘the first type of 2G signal’ and the term ‘W-CDMA’ issubstituted by ‘the second type of 2G signal’ for purposes ofimplementing the present embodiment. Here, the first type of 2G signaland the second type of 2G signal may be of any type of signalcategorized as 2G, including, but not limited to cdmaOne, GSM, andD-AMPS.

In sum, the present function described hereinbefore may be utilized forprocessing any combination of any type of signals.

For the avoidance of doubt, the multiple signal processing function maybe utilized while implementing the present function.

For the avoidance of doubt, all software programs described hereinbeforeto implement the present function may be executed solely by CPU 211(FIG. 1) or by Signal Processor 208 (FIG. 1), or by both CPU 211 andSignal Processor 208.

<<Automobile Controlling Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the automobile controlling functionwhich enables Communication Device 200 to remotely control an automobilein a wireless fashion via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in Automobile 835,i.e., an automobile or a car. In the present embodiment, Automobile 835includes Automobile Controlling Information Storage Area 83565 a ofwhich the data and the software programs stored therein are describedhereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Automobile ControllingInformation Storage Area 83565 a (Paragraph [0452]) may be downloadedfrom Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Information Storage Area 83565 a . In the presentembodiment, Automobile Controlling Information Storage Area 83565 aincludes Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 83565 b and AutomobileControlling Software Storage Area 83565 c. Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 83565 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Automobile 835, such as the ones describedhereinafter. Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 83565 c storesthe software programs necessary to implement the present function on theside of Automobile 835, such as the ones described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Data Storage Area 83565 b . In the present embodiment,Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 83565 b includes User AccessData Storage Area 83565 b 1, Window Data Storage Area 83565 b 2, DoorData Storage Area 83565 b 3, Radio Channel Data Storage Area 83565 b 4,TV Channel Data Storage Area 83565 b 5, Blinker Data Storage Area 83565b 6, and Work Area 83565 b 7. User Access Data Storage Area 83565 b 1stores the data described hereinafter. Window Data Storage Area 83565 b2 stores the data described hereinafter. Door Data Storage Area 83565 b3 stores the data described hereinafter. Radio Channel Data Storage Area83565 b 4 stores the data described hereinafter. TV Channel Data StorageArea 83565 b 5 stores the data described hereinafter. Blinker DataStorage Area 83565 b 6 stores the data described hereinafter. Work Area83565 b 7 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation andtemporarily store data. The data stored in Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 83565 b excluding the ones stored in User Access DataStorage Area 83565 b 1 and Work Area 83565 b 7 are primarily utilizedfor reinstallation, i.e., to reinstall the data to Communication Device200 as described hereinafter in case the data stored in CommunicationDevice 200 are corrupted or lost.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Access Data StorageArea 83565 b 1. In the present embodiment, User Access Data Storage Area83565 b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDs, and each user ID is anidentification of the user of Communication Device 200 authorized toimplement the present function. Column ‘Password Data’ stores thepassword data, and each password data represents the password set by theuser of the corresponding user ID. The password data is composed ofalphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, User Access Data StorageArea 83565 b 1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and thecorresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ andthe corresponding password data ‘Password Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#3’; and the user ID‘User#4’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#4’.According to the present example, the users represented by User#1through #4 are authorized to implement the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Window Data Storage Area83565 b 2. In the present embodiment, Window Data Storage Area 83565 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Window ID’ and ‘Window Data’. Column‘Window ID’ stores the window IDs, and each window ID is anidentification of the window (not shown) of Automobile 835. Column‘Window Data’ stores the window data, and each window data is the imagedata designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theposition of the window (not shown) of the corresponding window ID. Inthe present embodiment, Window Data Storage Area 83565 b 2 stores thefollowing data: the window ID ‘Window#1’ and the corresponding windowdata ‘Window Data#1’; the window ID ‘Window#2’ and the correspondingwindow data ‘Window Data#2’; the window ID ‘Window#3’ and thecorresponding window data ‘Window Data#3’; and the window ID ‘Window#4’and the corresponding window data ‘Window Data#4’. Four windows ofAutomobile 835 which are represented by the window IDs, ‘Window#1’through ‘Window#4’, are remotely controllable by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Door Data Storage Area83565 b 3. In the present embodiment, Door Data Storage Area 83565 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Door ID’ and ‘Door Data’. Column ‘Door ID’stores the door IDs, and each door ID is an identification of the door(not shown) of Automobile 835. Column ‘Door Data’ stores the door data,and each door data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the position of the door (not shown) of thecorresponding door ID. In the present embodiment, Door Data Storage Area83565 b 3 stores the following data: the door ID ‘Door#1’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#1’; the door ID ‘Door#2’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#2’; the door ID ‘Door#3’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#3’; and the door ID ‘Door#4’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#4’. Four doors of Automobile 835which are represented by the door IDs, ‘Door#1’ through ‘Door#4’, areremotely controllable by implementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Radio Channel Data StorageArea 83565 b 4. In the present embodiment, Radio Channel Data StorageArea 83565 b 4 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Radio Channel ID’ and‘Radio Channel Data’. Column ‘Radio Channel ID’ stores the radio channelIDs, and each radio channel ID is an identification of the radio channel(not shown) playable by the radio (not shown) installed in Automobile835. Column ‘Radio Channel Data’ stores the radio channel data, and eachradio channel data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the radio channel (not shown) of thecorresponding radio channel ID. In the present embodiment, Radio ChannelData Storage Area 83565 b 4 stores the following data: the radio channelID ‘Radio Channel#1’ and the corresponding radio channel data ‘RadioChannel Data#1’; the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#2’ and thecorresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#2’; the radiochannel ID ‘Radio Channel#3’ and the corresponding radio channel data‘Radio Channel Data#3’; and the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#4’ andthe corresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#4’. Four radiochannels which are represented by the radio channel IDs, ‘RadioChannel#1’ through ‘Radio Channel#4’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Channel Data StorageArea 83565 b 5. In the present embodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area83565 b 5 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘TV Channel ID’ and ‘TV ChannelData’. Column ‘TV Channel ID’ stores the TV channel IDs, and each TVchannel ID is an identification of the TV channel (not shown) playableby the TV (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. Column ‘TV ChannelData’ stores the TV channel data, and each TV channel data is the imagedata designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theTV channel (not shown) of the corresponding TV channel ID. In thepresent embodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area 83565 b 5 stores thefollowing data: the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#1’ and the correspondingTV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#1’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#2’and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#2’; the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#3’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#3’; and the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#4’ and thecorresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#4’. Four TV channelswhich are represented by the TV channel IDs, ‘TV Channel#1’ through ‘TVChannel#4’, are remotely controllable by implementing the presentinvention.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Blinker Data Storage Area83565 b 6. In the present embodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 83565 b6 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Blinker ID’ and ‘Blinker Data’. Column‘Blinker ID’ stores the blinker IDs, and each blinker ID is anidentification of the blinker (not shown) of Automobile 835. Column‘Blinker Data’ stores the blinker data, and each blinker data is theimage data designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which representsthe blinker (not shown) of the corresponding blinker ID. In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 83565 b 6 stores the followingdata: the blinker ID ‘Blinker#1’ and the corresponding blinker data‘Blinker Data#1’; and the blinker ID ‘Blinker#2’ and the correspondingblinker data ‘Blinker Data#2’. Two blinkers which are represented by theblinker IDs, ‘Blinker#1’ and ‘Blinker#2’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention. Here, the blinker (not shown)represented by ‘Blinker#1’ is the right blinker and the blinker (notshown) represented by ‘Blinker#2’ is the left blinker.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Software Storage Area 83565 c . In the present embodiment,Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 83565 c includes AutomobileController Storage Area 83565 c 1 and Remote Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 83565 c 2. Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1stores the controllers described hereinafter. Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 83565 c 2 stores the software programs describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the controllers stored in AutomobileController Storage Area 83565 c 1. In the present embodiment, AutomobileController Storage Area 83565 c 1 stores Engine Controller 83565 c 1 a,Direction Controller 83565 c 1 b, Speed Controller 83565 c 1 c, WindowController 83565 c 1 d, Door Controller 83565 c 1 e, Radio Controller83565 c 1 f, TV Controller 83565 c 1 g, Radio Channel Selector 83565 c 1h, TV Channel Selector 83565 c 1 i, Blinker Controller 83565 c 1 j,Emergency Lamp Controller 83565 c 1 k, Cruise Control Controller 83565 c11, and Speaker Volume Controller 83565 c 1 m. Engine Controller 83565 c1 a is the controller which controls the engine (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. Direction Controller 83565 c 1 b is the controller whichcontrols the steering wheel (not shown) of Automobile 835. SpeedController 83565 c 1 c is the controller which controls the accelerator(not shown) of Automobile 835. Window Controller 83565 c 1 d is thecontroller which controls the windows (not shown) of Automobile 835.Door Controller 83565 c 1 e is the controller which controls the doors(not shown) of Automobile 835. Radio Controller 83565 c 1 f is thecontroller which controls the radio (not shown) of Automobile 835. TVController 83565 c 1 g is the controller which controls the TV (notshown) of Automobile 835. Radio Channel Selector 83565 c 1 h is thecontroller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of the radio(not shown) installed in Automobile 835. TV Channel Selector 83565 c 1 iis the controller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of theradio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. Blinker Controller 83565c 1 j is the controller which controls the blinkers (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. Emergency Lamp Controller 83565 c 1 k is the controllerwhich controls the emergency lamp (not shown) of Automobile 835. CruiseControl Controller 83565 c 11 is the controller which controls thecruise control (not shown) of Automobile 835. Speaker Volume Controller83565 c 1 m is the controller which controls the speaker (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. As another embodiment, the foregoing controllers may bein the form of hardware instead of software.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in RemoteControlling Software Storage Area 83565 c 2. In the present embodiment,Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 83565 c 2 stores EngineControlling Software 83565 c 2 a, Direction Controlling Software 83565 c2 b, Speed Controlling Software 83565 c 2 c, Window Controlling Software83565 c 2 d, Door Controlling Software 83565 c 2 e, Radio ControllingSoftware 83565 c 2 f, TV Controlling Software 83565 c 2 g, Radio ChannelSelecting Software 83565 c 2 h, TV Channel Selecting Software 83565 c 2i, Blinker Controlling Software 83565 c 2 j, Emergency Lamp ControllingSoftware 83565 c 2 k, Cruise Control Controlling Software 83565 c 21,Speaker Volume Controlling Software 83565 c 2 m, Controller ReinstallingSoftware 83565 c 2 n, Data Reinstalling Software 83565 c 2 o, and UserAccess Authenticating Software 83565 c 2 p. Engine Controlling Software83565 c 2 a is the software program described hereinafter. DirectionControlling Software 83565 c 2 b is the software program describedhereinafter. Speed Controlling Software 83565 c 2 c is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Window Controlling Software 83565 c 2 dis the software program described hereinafter. Door Controlling Software83565 c 2 e is the software program described hereinafter. RadioControlling Software 83565 c 2 f is the software program describedhereinafter. TV Controlling Software 83565 c 2 g is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Radio Channel Selecting Software 83565 c 2 h isthe software program described hereinafter. TV Channel SelectingSoftware 83565 c 2 i is the software program described hereinafter.Blinker Controlling Software 83565 c 2 j is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 83565 c 2 kis the software program described hereinafter. Cruise ControlControlling Software 83565 c 21 is the software program describedhereinafter. Speaker Volume Controlling Software 83565 c 2 m is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Controller Reinstalling Software83565 c 2 n is the software program described hereinafter. DataReinstalling Software 83565 c 2 o is the software program describedhereinafter. User Access Authenticating Software 83565 c 2 p is thesoftware program described hereinafter. The controllers stored inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1 primarily functions asdirectly controlling Automobile 835 in the manner describedhereinbefore, and the software programs stored in Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 83565 c 2 controls the controllers stored inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1, by cooperating with thesoftware programs stored in Remote Controlling Software Storage Area20665 c 2 of Communication Device 200, in a wireless fashion via Antenna218 (FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, RAM 206 includesAutomobile Controlling Information Storage Area 20665 a of which thedata and the software programs stored therein are described hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in Automobile ControllingInformation Storage Area 20665 a may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Information Storage Area 20665 a . In the presentembodiment, Automobile Controlling Information Storage Area 20665 aincludes Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 20665 b and AutomobileControlling Software Storage Area 20665 c. Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 20665 b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter. Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area20665 c stores the software programs necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Communication Device 200, such as the onesdescribed hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Data Storage Area 20665 b . In the present embodiment,Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 20665 b includes User AccessData Storage Area 20665 b 1, Window Data Storage Area 20665 b 2, DoorData Storage Area 20665 b 3, Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665 b 4,TV Channel Data Storage Area 20665 b 5, Blinker Data Storage Area 20665b 6, and Work Area 20665 b 7. User Access Data Storage Area 20665 b 1stores the data described herinafter . Window Data Storage Area 20665 b2 stores the data described hereinafter. Door Data Storage Area 20665 b3 stores the data described hereinafter. Radio Channel Data Storage Area20665 b 4 stores the data described hereinafter. TV Channel Data StorageArea 20665 b 5 stores the data described hereinafter. Blinker DataStorage Area 20665 b 6 stores the data described hereinafter. Work Area20665 b 7 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation andtemporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in User Access Data StorageArea 20665 b 1. In the present embodiment, User Access Data Storage Area20665 b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’.Column ‘User ID’ stores the user ID which is an identification of theuser of Communication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores thepassword data which represents the password set by the user ofCommunication Device 200. The password data is composed of alphanumericdata. In the present embodiment, User Access Data Storage Area 20665 b 1stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the correspondingpassword data ‘Password Data#1’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Window Data Storage Area20665 b 2. In the present embodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20665 b 2comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Window ID’ and ‘Window Data’. Column‘Window ID’ stores the window IDs, and each window ID is anidentification of the window (not shown) of Automobile 835. Column‘Window Data’ stores the window data, and each window data is the imagedata designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theposition of the window (not shown) of the corresponding window ID. Inthe present embodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20665 b 2 stores thefollowing data: the window ID ‘Window#1’ and the corresponding windowdata ‘Window Data#1’; the window ID ‘Window#2’ and the correspondingwindow data ‘Window Data#2’; the window ID ‘Window#3’ and thecorresponding window data ‘Window Data#3’; and the window ID ‘Window#4’and the corresponding window data ‘Window Data#4’. Four windows ofAutomobile 835 which are represented by the window IDs, ‘Window#1’through ‘Window#4’, are remotely controllable by implementing thepresent function.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Door Data Storage Area20665 b 3. In the present embodiment, Door Data Storage Area 20665 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Door ID’ and ‘Door Data’. Column ‘DoorData’ stores the door data, and each door data is the image datadesigned to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theposition of the door (not shown) of the corresponding door ID. In thepresent embodiment, Door Data Storage Area 20665 b 3 stores thefollowing data: the door ID ‘Door#1’ and the corresponding door data‘Door Data#1’; the door ID ‘Door#2’ and the corresponding door data‘Door Data#2’; the door ID ‘Door#3’ and the corresponding door data‘Door Data#3’; and the door ID ‘Door#4’ and the corresponding door data‘Door Data#4’. Four doors of Automobile 835 which are represented by thedoor IDs, ‘Door#1’ through ‘Door#4’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present function.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Radio Channel Data StorageArea 20665 b 4. In the present embodiment, Radio Channel Data StorageArea 20665 b 4 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Radio Channel ID’ and‘Radio Channel Data’. Column ‘Radio Channel ID’ stores the radio channelIDs, and each radio channel ID is an identification of the radio channel(not shown) playable by the radio (not shown) installed in Automobile835. Column ‘Radio Channel Data’ stores the radio channel data, and eachradio channel data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the radio channel (not shown) of thecorresponding radio channel ID. In the present embodiment, Radio ChannelData Storage Area 20665 b 4 stores the following data: the radio channelID ‘Radio Channel#1’ and the corresponding radio channel data ‘RadioChannel Data#1’; the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#2’ and thecorresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#2’; the radiochannel ID ‘Radio Channel#3’ and the corresponding radio channel data‘Radio Channel Data#3’; and the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#4’ andthe corresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#4’. Four radiochannels which are represented by the radio channel IDs, ‘RadioChannel#1’ through ‘Radio Channel#4’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in TV Channel Data StorageArea 20665 b 5. In the present embodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area20665 b 5 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘TV Channel ID’ and ‘TV ChannelData’. Column ‘TV Channel ID’ stores the TV channel IDs, and each TVchannel ID is an identification of the TV channel (not shown) playableby the TV (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. Column ‘TV ChannelData’ stores the TV channel data, and each TV channel data is the imagedata designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theTV channel (not shown) of the corresponding TV channel ID. In thepresent embodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area 20665 b 5 stores thefollowing data: the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#1’ and the correspondingTV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#1’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#2’and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#2’; the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#3’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#3’; and the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#4’ and thecorresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#4’. Four TV channelswhich are represented by the TV channel IDs, ‘TV Channel#1’ through ‘TVChannel#4’, are remotely controllable by implementing the presentinvention.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Blinker Data Storage Area20665 b 6. In the present embodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 20665 b6 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Blinker ID’ and ‘Blinker Data’. Column‘Blinker ID’ stores the blinker IDs, and each blinker ID is anidentification of the blinker (not shown) of Automobile 835. Column‘Blinker Data’ stores the blinker data, and each blinker data is theimage data designed to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which representsthe blinker (not shown) of the corresponding blinker ID. In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 20665 b 6 stores the followingdata: the blinker ID ‘Blinker#1’ and the corresponding blinker data‘Blinker Data#1’; and the blinker ID ‘Blinker#2’ and the correspondingblinker data ‘Blinker Data#2’. Two blinkers which are represented by theblinker IDs, ‘Blinker#1’ and ‘Blinker#2’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention. Here, the blinker (not shown)represented by ‘Blinker#1’ is the right blinker and the blinker (notshown) represented by ‘Blinker#2’ is the left blinker.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in AutomobileControlling Software Storage Area 20665 c . In the present embodiment,Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 20665 c includes AutomobileController Storage Area 20665 c 1 and Remote Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 20665 c 2. Automobile Controller Storage Area 20665 c 1stores the controllers described hereinafter. Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 20665 c 2 stores the software programs describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the controllers stored in AutomobileController Storage Area 20665 c 1. In the present embodiment, AutomobileController Storage Area 20665 c 1 stores Engine Controller 20665 c 1 a,Direction Controller 20665 c 1 b, Speed Controller 20665 c 1 c, WindowController 20665 c 1 d, Door Controller 20665 c 1 e, Radio Controller20665 c 1 f, TV Controller 20665 c 1 g, Radio Channel Selector 20665 c 1h, TV Channel Selector 20665 c 1 i, Blinker Controller 20665 c 1 j,Emergency Lamp Controller 20665 c 1 k, Cruise Control Controller 20665 c11, and Speaker Volume Controller 20665 c 1 m. Engine Controller 20665 c1 a is the controller which controls the engine (not shown) ofAutomobile 206. Direction Controller 20665 c 1 b is the controller whichcontrols the steering wheel (not shown) of Automobile 206. SpeedController 20665 c 1 c is the controller which controls the accelerator(not shown) of Automobile 206. Window Controller 20665 c 1 d is thecontroller which controls the windows (not shown) of Automobile 206.Door Controller 20665 c 1 e is the controller which controls the doors(not shown) of Automobile 206. Radio Controller 20665 c 1 f is thecontroller which controls the radio (not shown) of Automobile 206. TVController 20665 c 1 g is the controller which controls the TV (notshown) of Automobile 206. Radio Channel Selector 20665 c 1 h is thecontroller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of the radio(not shown) installed in Automobile 206. TV Channel Selector 20665 c 1 iis the controller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of theradio (not shown) installed in Automobile 206. Blinker Controller 20665c 1 j is the controller which controls the blinkers (not shown) ofAutomobile 206. Emergency Lamp Controller 20665 c 1 k is the controllerwhich controls the emergency lamp (not shown) of Automobile 206. CruiseControl Controller 20665 c 1 l is the controller which controls thecruise control (not shown) of Automobile 206. Speaker Volume Controller20665 c 1 m is the controller which controls the speaker (not shown) ofAutomobile 206. As another embodiment, the foregoing controllers may bein the form of hardware instead of software. The data stored inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 20665 c 1 are primarily utilized forreinstallation, i.e., to reinstall the data to Automobile 835 asdescribed hereinafter in case the data stored in Automobile 835 arecorrupted or lost.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in RemoteControlling Software Storage Area 20665 c 2. In the present embodiment,Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20665 c 2 stores EngineControlling Software 20665 c 2 a, Direction Controlling Software 20665 c2 b, Speed Controlling Software 20665 c 2 c, Window Controlling Software20665 c 2 d, Door Controlling Software 20665 c 2 e, Radio ControllingSoftware 20665 c 2 f, TV Controlling Software 20665 c 2 g, Radio ChannelSelecting Software 20665 c 2 h, TV Channel Selecting Software 20665 c 2i, Blinker Controlling Software 20665 c 2 j, Emergency Lamp ControllingSoftware 20665 c 2 k, Cruise Control Controlling Software 20665 c 21,Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665 c 2 m, Controller ReinstallingSoftware 20665 c 2 n, Data Reinstalling Software 20665 c 2 o, and UserAccess Authenticating Software 20665 c 2 p. Engine Controlling Software20665 c 2 a is the software program described hereinafter. DirectionControlling Software 20665 c 2 b is the software program describedhereinafter. Speed Controlling Software 20665 c 2 c is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Window Controlling Software 20665 c 2 dis the software program described hereinafter. Door Controlling Software20665 c 2 e is the software program described hereinafter. RadioControlling Software 20665 c 2 f is the software program describedhereinafter. TV Controlling Software 20665 c 2 g is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Radio Channel Selecting Software 20665 c 2 h isthe software program described hereinafter. TV Channel SelectingSoftware 20665 c 2 i is the software program described hereinafter.Blinker Controlling Software 20665 c 2 j is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 20665 c 2 kis the software program described hereinafter. Cruise ControlControlling Software 20665 c 21 is the software program describedhereinafter. Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665 c 2 m is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Controller Reinstalling Software20665 c 2 n is the software program described hereinafter. DataReinstalling Software 20665 c 2 o is the software program describedhereinafter. User Access Authenticating Software 20665 c 2 p is thesoftware program described hereinafter. The controllers stored inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1 primarily functions asdirectly controlling Automobile 835 in the manner describedhereinbefore, and the software programs stored in Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 83565 c 2 controls the controllers stored inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1, by cooperating with thesoftware programs stored in Remote Controlling Software Storage Area83565 c 2 of Automobile 835, in a wireless fashion via Antenna 218 (FIG.1).

This paragraph illustrates User Access Authenticating Software 83565 c 2p of Automobile 835 and User Access Authenticating Software 20665 c 2 pof Communication Device 200, which determine whether CommunicationDevice 200 in question is authorized to remotely control Automobile 835by implementing the present function. In the present embodiment, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs the user ID and the passworddata by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem. The user ID and the password data are temporarily stored in UserAccess Data Storage Area 20665 b 1 from which the two data are sent toAutomobile 835 (S1). Assume that the user input ‘User#1’ as the user IDand ‘Password Data#1’ as the password data. Upon receiving the user IDand the password data (in the present example, User#1 and PasswordData#1) from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores the twodata in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile 835 then initiates theauthentication process to determine whether Communication Device 200 inquestion is authorized to remotely control Automobile 835 by referringto the data stored in User Access Data Storage Area 83565 b 1 (S3).Assume that the authenticity of Communication Device 200 in question iscleared. Automobile 835 permits Communication Device 200 in question toremotely control Automobile 835 in the manner described hereinafter(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Engine Controlling Software 83565 c 2 a ofAutomobile 835 and Engine Controlling Software 20665 c 2 a ofCommunication Device 200, which ignite or turn off the engine (notshown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs an engine controlling signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Thesignal is sent to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the engine controllingsignal indicates either to ignite the engine or turn off the engine.Upon receiving the engine controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2).Automobile 835 controls the engine (not shown) via Engine Controller83565 c 1 a in accordance with the engine controlling signal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Direction Controlling Software 83565 c 2 b ofAutomobile 835 and Direction Controlling Software 20665 c 2 b ofCommunication Device 200, which control the direction of Automobile 835.In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs adirection controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system. The signal is sent to Automobile 835 (S1).Here, the direction controlling signal indicates either to move forward,back, left, or right Automobile 835. Upon receiving the directioncontrolling signal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 storesthe signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile 835 controls thedirection via Direction Controller 83565 c 1 b in accordance with thedirection controlling signal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Speed Controlling Software 83565 c 2 c ofAutomobile 835 and Speed Controlling Software 20665 c 2 c ofCommunication Device 200, which control the speed of Automobile 835. Inthe present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs aspeed controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system. The signal is sent to Automobile 835 (S1).Here, the speed controlling signal indicates either to increase speed ordecrease speed of Automobile 835. Upon receiving the speed controllingsignal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores the signalin Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile 835 controls the speed via SpeedController 83565 c 1 c In accordance the with speed controlling signal(S3).

This paragraph illustrates Window Controlling Software 83565 c 2 d ofAutomobile 835 and Window Controlling Software 20665 c 2 d ofCommunication Device 200, which control the window (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all window data from Window DataStorage Area 20665 b 2 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the window data (forexample, Window Data#1), and CPU 211 identifies the corresponding windowID (for example, Window#1) by referring to Window Data Storage Area20665 b 2 (S2). The user further inputs a window controlling signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S3). Here, the window controlling signal indicates either to open thewindow or to close the window. CPU 211 sends the window ID and thewindow controlling signal to Automobile 835 (S4). Upon receiving thewindow ID and the window controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S5).Automobile 835 controls the window identified by the window ID viaWindow Controller 83565 c 1 d in accordance with the window controllingsignal (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Door Controlling Software 83565 c 2 e ofAutomobile 835 and Door Controlling Software 20665 c 2 e ofCommunication Device 200, which control the door (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all door data from Door Data StorageArea 20665 b 3 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects one of the door data (for example,Door Data#1), and CPU 211 identifies the corresponding door ID (forexample, Door#1) by referring to Door Data Storage Area 20665 b 3 (S2).The user further inputs a door controlling signal by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Here, the doorcontrolling signal indicates either to open the door or to close thedoor (S3). CPU 211 sends the door ID and the door controlling signal toAutomobile 835 (S4). Upon receiving the door ID and the door controllingsignal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores both data inWork Area 83565 b 7 (S5). Automobile 835 controls the door identified bythe door ID via Door Controller 83565 c 1 e in accordance with the doorcontrolling signal (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Radio Controlling Software 83565 c 2 f ofAutomobile 835 and Radio Controlling Software 20665 c 2 f ofCommunication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the radio (notshown) installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, the userof Communication Device 200 inputs a radio controlling signal, and CPU211 sends the signal to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the radio controllingsignal indicates either to turn on the radio or to turn off the radio.Upon receiving the radio controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2).Automobile 835 controls the radio via Radio Controller 83565 c 1 f inaccordance with the radio controlling signal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates TV Controlling Software 83565 c 2 g ofAutomobile 835 and TV Controlling Software 20665 c 2 g of CommunicationDevice 200, which turn on or turn off the TV (not shown) installed inAutomobile 835. In the present embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 inputs a TV controlling signal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sendsthe signal to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the TV controlling signalindicates either to turn on the TV or to turn off the TV. Upon receivingthe TV controlling signal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile 835 controlsthe TV via TV Controller 83565 c 1 g in accordance with the TVcontrolling signal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Radio Channel Selecting Software 83565 c 2 hof Automobile 835 and Radio Channel Selecting Software 20665 c 2 h ofCommunication Device 200, which select the channel of the radio (notshown) installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves all radio channel datafrom Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665 b 4 and Displays the data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects oneof the radio channel data (for example, Radio Channel Data#1), and CPU211 identifies the corresponding radio channel ID (for example, RadioChannel#1) by referring to Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665 b 4(S2). CPU 211 sends the radio channel ID and the radio channelcontrolling signal to Automobile 835 (S3). Here, the radio channelcontrolling signal indicates to change the radio channel to the oneidentified by the radio channel ID. Upon receiving the radio channel IDand the radio channel controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S4). Automobile835 controls the radio channel of the radio via Radio Channel Selector83565 c 1 h in accordance with the Radio Channel Controlling Signal(S5).

This paragraph illustrates TV Channel Selecting Software 83565 c 2 i ofAutomobile 835 and TV Channel Selecting Software 20665 c 2 i ofCommunication Device 200, which select the channel of the TV (not shown)installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200 retrieves all TV channel data from TVChannel Data Storage Area 20665 b 5 and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theTV channel data, and CPU 211 identifies the corresponding TV channel ID(for example, TV Channel#1) by referring to TV Channel Data Storage Area20665 b 5 (S2). CPU 211 sends the TV channel ID and the TV channelcontrolling signal to Automobile 835 (S3). Here, the TV channelcontrolling signal indicates to change the TV channel to the oneidentified by the TV channel ID. Upon receiving the TV channel ID andthe TV channel controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S4). Automobile835 controls the TV Channel via TV Channel Selector 83565 c 1 i inaccordance with the TV channel controlling signal (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Blinker Controlling Software 83565 c 2 j ofAutomobile 835 and Blinker Controlling Software 20665 c 2 j ofCommunication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the blinker (notshown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all blinker data from Blinker DataStorage Area 20665 b 6 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the blinker data,and CPU 211 identifies the corresponding blinker ID (for exampleBlinker#1) by referring to Blinker Data Storage Area 20665 b 6 (S2). CPU211 sends the blinker ID and the blinker controlling signal toAutomobile 835 (S3). Here, the blinker controlling signal indicateseither to turn on or turn off the blinker identified by the blinker ID.Upon receiving the blinker ID and the blinker controlling signal fromCommunication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area83565 b 7 (S4). Automobile 835 controls the blinker via BlinkerController 20665 c 1 j in accordance with the blinker controlling signal(S5).

This paragraph illustrates Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 83565 c 2k of Automobile 835 and Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 20665 c 2 kof Communication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the emergencylamp (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an emergency lampcontrolling signal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile835 (S1). Here, the emergency lamp controlling signal indicates eitherto turn on the emergency lamp or to turn off the emergency lamp. Uponreceiving the emergency lamp controlling signal from CommunicationDevice 200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7(S2). Automobile 835 controls the emergency lamp via Emergency LampController 83565 c 1 k in accordance with the emergency lamp controllingsignal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Cruise Control Controlling Software 83565 c21 of Automobile 835 and Cruise Control Controlling Software 20665 c 21of Communication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the cruisecontrol (not shown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs a cruise control controllingsignal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile 835 (S1).Here, the cruise control controlling signal indicates either to turn onthe cruise control or turn off the cruise control. Upon receiving thecruise control controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile835 controls the cruise control via Cruise Control Controller 83565 c 11in accordance with the cruise control controlling signal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Speaker Volume Controlling Software 83565 c 2m of Automobile 835 and Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665 c 2 mof Communication Device 200, which raise or lower the volume of thespeaker (not shown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs a speaker volume controllingsignal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile 835 (S1).Here, the speaker volume controlling signal indicates either to raisethe volume or lower the volume of the speaker. Upon receiving thespeaker volume controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile835 controls the speaker volume of the speaker via Speaker VolumeController 83565 c 1 m in accordance with the speaker volume controllingsignal (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Controller Reinstalling Software 83565 c 2 nof Automobile 835 and Controller Reinstalling Software 20665 c 2 n ofCommunication Device 200, which reinstalls the controllers to AutomobileController Storage Area 83565 c 1. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves all controllers fromAutomobile Controller Storage Area 20665 c 1, and sends the controllersto Automobile 835 (S1). Upon receiving the controllers fromCommunication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores the controllers in WorkArea 83565 b 7 (S2). Automobile 835 then reinstalls the controllers inAutomobile Controller Storage Area 83565 c 1 (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Data Reinstalling Software 83565 c 2 o ofAutomobile 835 and Data Reinstalling Software 20665 c 2 o ofCommunication Device 200, which reinstall the data to AutomobileControlling Data Storage Area 20665 b. In the present embodiment,Automobile 835 retrieves all data from Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 83565 b, and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S1). Upon receiving the data from Automobile 835, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 stores the data in Work Area 20665 b 7 (S2).CPU 211 then reinstalls the data in Automobile Controlling Data StorageArea 20665 b (S3).

Automobile 835 is not limited to an automobile or a car; the presentfunction may be implemented with any type of carrier or vehicle, such asairplane, space ship, artificial satellite, space station, train, andmotor cycle.

<<OCR Function>>

This paragraph illustrates the storage area included in RAM 206 (FIG.1). In this embodiment, RAM 206 includes OCR Information Storage Area20666 a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed hereinafter.

The data and/or the software programs stored in OCR Information StorageArea 20666 a 2 may be downloaded from Host H.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OCR InformationStorage Area 20666 a . In this embodiment, OCR Information Storage Area20666 a includes OCR Data Storage Area 20666 b and OCR Software StorageArea 20666 c. OCR Data Storage Area 20666 b stores the data necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described hereinafter.OCR Software Storage Area 20666 c stores the software programs necessaryto implement the present function, such as the ones describedhereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the storage areas included in OCR DataStorage Area 20666 b . In this embodiment, OCR Data Storage Area 20666 bincludes Web Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 1, Email Address DataStorage Area 20666 b 2, Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3, AlphanumericData Storage Area 20666 b 4, Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5, and WorkArea 20666 b 6. Web Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 1 stores the datadescribed hereinafter. Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2 storesthe data described hereinafter. Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3 storesthe data described hereinafter. Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4stores the data described hereinafter. Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5stores the data described hereinafter. Work Area 20666 b 6 is utilizedas a work area to perform calculation and temporarily store data.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Web Address Data StorageArea 20666 b 1. In this embodiment, Web Address Data Storage Area 20666b 1 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Web Address ID’ and ‘Web AddressData’. Column ‘Web Address ID’ stores the web address IDs, and each webaddress ID is the title of the corresponding web address data stored incolumn ‘Web Address Data’ utilized for identification purposes. Column‘Web Address Data’ stores the web address data, and each web addressdata represents a web address composed of alphanumeric data of which thefirst portion thereof is ‘http://’. In this embodiment, Web Address DataStorage Area 20666 b 1 stores the following data: the web address ID‘Web Address#1’ and the corresponding web address data ‘Web AddressData#1’; the web address ID ‘Web Address#2’ and the corresponding webaddress data ‘Web Address Data#2’; the web address ID ‘Web Address#3’and the corresponding web address data ‘Web Address Data#3’; and the webaddress ID ‘Web Address#4’ and the corresponding web address data ‘WebAddress Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Email Address Data StorageArea 20666 b 2. In this embodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area20666 b 2 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Email Address ID’ and ‘EmailAddress Data’. Column ‘Email Address ID’ stores the email address IDs,and each email address ID is the title of the corresponding emailaddress data stored in column ‘Email Address Data’ utilized foridentification purposes. Column ‘Email Address Data’ stores the emailaddress data, and each email address data represents an email addresscomposed of alphanumeric data which includes ‘@’ mark therein. In thisembodiment, Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2 stores thefollowing data: the email address ID ‘Email Address#1’ and thecorresponding email address data ‘Email Address Data#1’; the emailaddress ID ‘Email Address#2’ and the corresponding email address data‘Email Address Data#2’; the email address ID ‘Email Address#3’ and thecorresponding email address data ‘Email Address Data#3’; and the emailaddress ID ‘Email Address#4’ and the corresponding email address data‘Email Address Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Phone Data Storage Area20666 b 3. In this embodiment, Phone Data Storage Area 20666 b 3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Phone ID’ and ‘Phone Data’. Column ‘PhoneID’ stores the phone IDs, and each phone ID is the title of thecorresponding phone data stored in column ‘Phone Data’ utilized foridentification purposes. Column ‘Phone Data’ stores the phone data, andeach phone data represents a phone number composed of numeric figure ofwhich the format is ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’. In this embodiment, Phone DataStorage Area 20666 b 3 stores the following data: the phone ID ‘Phone#1’and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#1’; the phone ID ‘Phone#2’and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#2’; the phone ID ‘Phone#3’and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#3’; and the phone ID‘Phone#4’ and the corresponding phone data ‘Phone Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Alphanumeric Data StorageArea 20666 b 4. In this embodiment, Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b 4 comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Alphanumeric ID’ and ‘AlphanumericData’. Column ‘Alphanumeric ID’ stores alphanumeric IDs, and eachalphanumeric ID is the title of the corresponding alphanumeric datastored in column ‘Alphanumeric Data’ utilized for identificationpurposes. Column ‘Alphanumeric Data’ stores the alphanumeric data, andeach alphanumeric data represents alphanumeric figure primarily composedof numbers, texts, words, and letters. In this embodiment, AlphanumericData Storage Area 20666 b 4 stores the following data: the alphanumericID ‘Alphanumeric#1’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data‘Alphanumeric Data#1’; the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#2’ and thecorresponding alphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#2’; the alphanumericID ‘Alphanumeric#3’ and the corresponding alphanumeric data‘Alphanumeric Data#3’; and the alphanumeric ID ‘Alphanumeric#4’ and thecorresponding alphanumeric data ‘Alphanumeric Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the data stored in Image Data Storage Area20666 b 5. In this embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Image ID’ and ‘Image Data’. Column ‘ImageID’ stores the image IDs, and each image ID is the title of thecorresponding image data stored in column ‘Image Data’ utilized foridentification purposes. Column ‘Image Data’ stores the image data, andeach image data is a data composed of image such as the image input viaCCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, Image Data Storage Area 20666b 5 stores the following data: the Image ID ‘Image#1’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#1’; the Image ID ‘Image#2’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#2’; the Image ID ‘Image#3’ and thecorresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#3’; and the Image ID ‘Image#4’ andthe corresponding Image Data ‘Image Data#4’.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in OCR SoftwareStorage Area 20666 c . In this embodiment, OCR Software Storage Area20666 c stores Image Data Scanning Software 20666 c 1, Image DataStoring Software 20666 c 2, OCR Software 20666 c 3, Alphanumeric DataStoring Software 20666 c 4, Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666c 5 a, Web Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c 5 b, Web AddressData Storing Software 20666 c 5 c, Address Accessing Software 20666 c 5d, Email Address Data Identifying Software 20666 c 6 a, Email AddressData Correcting Software 20666 c 6 b, Email Address Data StoringSoftware 20666 c 6 c, Email Editing Software 20666 c 6 d, Phone DataIdentifying Software 20666 c 7 a, Phone Data Correcting Software 20666 c7 b, Phone Data Storing Software 20666 c 7 c, and Dialing Software 20666c 7 d. Image Data Scanning Software 20666 c 1 is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Image Data Storing Software 20666 c 2 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. OCR Software 20666 c 3 is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Alphanumeric Data StoringSoftware 20666 c 4 is the software program described hereinafter. WebAddress Data Identifying Software 20666 c 5 a is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Web Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c 5 bis the software program described hereinafter. Web Address Data StoringSoftware 20666 c 5 c is the software program described hereinafter. WebAddress Accessing Software 20666 c 5 d is the software program describedhereinafter. Email Address Data Identifying Software 20666 c 6 a is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Email Address Data CorrectingSoftware 20666 c 6 b is the software program described hereinafter.Email Address Data Storing Software 20666 c 6 c is the software programdescribed hereinafter. Email Editing Software 20666 c 6 d is thesoftware program described hereinafter. Phone Data Identifying Software20666 c 7 a is the software program described hereinafter. Phone DataCorrecting Software 20666 c 7 b is the software program describedhereinafter. Phone Data Storing Software 20666 c 7 c is the softwareprogram described hereinafter. Dialing Software 20666 c 7 d is thesoftware program described hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates Image Data Scanning Software 20666 c 1 ofCommunication Device 200, which scans an image by utilizing CCD Unit(FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) scans an image byutilizing CCD Unit (FIG. 1) (S1), and stores the extracted image data inWork Area 20666 b 6 (S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the image data fromWork Area 20666 b 6 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Image Data Storing Software 20666 c 2 ofCommunication Device 200, which stores the image data scanned by CCDUnit (FIG. 1). In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the imagedata from Work Area 20666 b 6 and displays the data On LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an image ID, i.e., atitle of the image data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 then stores the image ID and theimage data in Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5 (S3).

This paragraph illustrates OCR Software 20666 c 3 of CommunicationDevice 200, which extracts alphanumeric data from image data byutilizing the method so-called ‘optical character recognition’ or ‘OCR’.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves the image IDs from ImageData Storage Area 20666 b 5 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1)(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the image IDsby utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 then retrieves the image data of the image ID selected inS2 from Image Data Storage Area 20666 b 5 and displays the image data onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 executes the OCR process, i.e., extractsalphanumeric data from the image data (S4), and stores the extractedalphanumeric data in Work Area 20666 b 6 (S5).

This paragraph illustrates Alphanumeric Data Storing Software 20666 c 4of Communication Device 200, which stores the extracted alphanumericdata in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4. In this embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an alphanumeric ID (i.e.,the title of the alphanumeric data) (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) thenretrieves the alphanumeric data from Work Area 20666 b 6 (S2), andstores the data in Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 with theAlphanumeric ID (S3).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Identifying Software 20666 c5 a of Communication Device 200, which identifies the web address dataamong the Alphanumeric Data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b 4 and displays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects one of the Alphanumeric IDs byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 retrieves the corresponding alphanumeric data fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 and displays the data on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3in Work Area 20666 b 6 for the web address data identification explainedin the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e.,applies the web address criteria (for example, ‘http://’, ‘www.’,‘.com’, ‘.org’, ‘.edu’) to each alphanumeric data, and identifies theweb address data included therein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes theidentified web address data by changing the font color (for example,blue) and drawing underlines to the identified web address data (S6).CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data with the identified web addressdata emphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Correcting Software 20666 c5 b of Communication Device 200, which corrects the misidentified webaddress data by manually selecting the start point and the end point ofthe web address data. For example, if the web address data ismisidentified as ‘www.yahoo’ and leaves out the remaining ‘com’, theuser of Communication Device 200 may manually correct the web addressdata by selecting the start point and the end point of ‘www.yahoo.com’.In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data withweb address data emphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects the start point of the web address data (S2) and the end pointof the web address data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifies the alphanumericdata located between the start point and the end point as web addressdata (S4), and emphasizes the web address data by changing the fontcolor (for example, blue) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). Thealphanumeric data with the web address data emphasized are displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Data Storing Software 20666 c 5 cof Communication Device 200, which stores the web address data in WebAddress Data Storage Area 20666 b 1. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with web address data emphasized(S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of the webaddress data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, changeto bold font) (S2). The user then inputs the web address ID (the titleof the web address data) (S3). CPU 211 stores the web address ID and theweb address data in Web Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 1 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Web Address Accessing Software 20666 c 5 d ofCommunication Device 200, which accesses the web site represented by theweb address data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays thealphanumeric data with web address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the web address data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (forexample, click one of the web address data) (S2). CPU 211 then opens aninternet browser (for example, the Internet Explorer) and enters the webaddress data selected in S2 therein (S3). CPU 211 accesses the web sitethereafter (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Identifying Software 20666c 6 a of Communication Device 200, which identifies the email addressdata among the alphanumeric data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves the alphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666b 4 and displays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S2). CPU 211 retrieves the corresponding alphanumeric data fromAlphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 and displays the data on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S3). CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3in Work Area 20666 b 6 for the email address data identificationexplained in the next step (S4). CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data,i.e., applies the email address criteria (for example, ‘@’) to eachalphanumeric data, and identifies the email address data includedtherein (S5). CPU 211 emphasizes the identified email address data bychanging the font color (for example, green) and drawing underlines tothe identified email address data (S6). CPU 211 displays thealphanumeric data with the identified email address data emphasized onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Correcting Software 20666c 6 b of Communication Device 200, which corrects the misidentifiedemail address data by manually selecting the start point and the endpoint of the email address data. For example, if the email address datais misidentified as ‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo’ and leaves out the remaining‘.com’, the user of Communication Device 200 may manually correct theemail address data by selecting the start point and the end point of‘iwaofujisaki@yahoo.com’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with email address data emphasized (S1). The userof Communication Device 200 selects the start point of the email addressdata (S2) and the end point of the email address data by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 thenidentifies the alphanumeric data located between the start point and theend point as email address data (S4), and emphasizes the email addressdata by changing the font color (for example, green) and drawingunderlines thereto (S5). The alphanumeric data with the email addressdata emphasized are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Email Address Data Storing Software 20666 c 6c of Communication Device 200, which stores the email address data toEmail Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2. In this embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) displays the alphanumeric data with the email address dataemphasized (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theemail address data, and CPU 211 emphasizes the data (for example, changeto bold font) (S2). The user then inputs the email address ID (the titleof the email address data) by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 stores the email address ID andthe email address data in Email Address Data Storage Area 20666 b 2(S4).

This paragraph illustrates Email Editing Software 20666 c 6 d ofCommunication Device 200, which opens an email editor (for example, theOutlook Express) wherein the email address data is set as the receiver'saddress. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displays the alphanumericdata with the email address data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the email address data (forexample, click one of the email address data) by utilizing Input Device210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S2). CPU 211 then opens anemail editor (for example, the Outlook Express) (S3), and sets the emailaddress data selected in S2 as the receiver's address (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Identifying Software 20666 c 7 aof Communication Device 200, which identifies the phone data among thealphanumeric data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves thealphanumeric IDs from Alphanumeric Data Storage Area 20666 b 4 anddisplays the alphanumeric IDs on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the alphanumeric IDs (S2). CPU211 retrieves the corresponding alphanumeric data from Alphanumeric DataStorage Area 20666 b 4 and displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S3).CPU 211 stores the alphanumeric data retrieved in S3 in Work Area 20666b 6 for the phone data identification explained in the next step (S4).CPU 211 scans the alphanumeric data, i.e., applies the phone criteria(for example, numeric data with ‘xxx-xxx-xxxx’ format) to eachalphanumeric data, and identifies the phone data included therein (S5).CPU 211 emphasizes the identified phone data by changing the font color(for example, yellow) and drawing underlines to the identified phonedata (S6). CPU 211 displays the alphanumeric data with the identifiedphone data emphasized on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S7).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Correcting Software 20666 c 7 b ofCommunication Device 200, which corrects the misidentified phone data bymanually selecting the start point and the end point of the phone data.For example, if the phone data is misidentified as ‘916-455-’ and leavesout the remaining ‘1293’, the user of Communication Device 200 maymanually correct the phone data by selecting the start point and the endpoint of ‘916-455-1293’. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with phone data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects the start point of the phone data (S2)and the end point of the phone data by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). CPU 211 then identifiesthe alphanumeric data located between the start point and the end pointas phone data (S4), and emphasizes the phone data by changing the fontcolor (for example, yellow) and drawing underlines thereto (S5). Thealphanumeric data with the phone data emphasized are displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) thereafter (S6).

This paragraph illustrates Phone Data Storing Software 20666 c 7 c ofCommunication Device 200, which stores the phone data to Phone DataStorage Area 20666 b 3. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) displaysthe alphanumeric data with the phone data emphasized (S1). The user ofCommunication Device 200 selects one of the phone data, and CPU 211emphasizes the data (for example, change to bold font) (S2). The userthen inputs the phone ID (the title of the phone data) (S3). CPU 211stores the phone ID and the phone data in Phone Data Storage Area 20666b 3 (S4).

This paragraph illustrates Dialing Software 20666 c 7 d of CommunicationDevice 200, which opens a phone dialer and initiates a dialing processby utilizing the phone data. In this embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)displays the alphanumeric data with the phone data emphasized (S1). Theuser of Communication Device 200 selects one of the phone data byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (forexample, click one of the phone data) (S2). CPU 211 then opens a phonedialer (S3), and inputs the phone data selected in S2 (S4). A dialingprocess is initiated thereafter.

<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

The following paragraphs illustrate the multiple mode implementingfunction of Communication Device 200 which enables to activate andimplement a plurality of modes, functions, and/or systems described inthis specification simultaneously.

This paragraph illustrates the software programs stored in RAM 206(FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementing function (FIG. 1).RAM 206 includes Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690 a.Multiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690 a stores Multiple ModeImplementer 20690 b, Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f, all of which are software programs.Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b administers the overall implementationof the present function. One of the major tasks of Multiple ModeImplementer 20690 b is to administer and control the timing and sequenceof Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater20690 f. For example, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b executes them inthe following order: Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e, and ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f. Mode List Displaying Software 20690 cdisplays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a list of a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems explained in this specification of which thesequence is explained hereinafter. Mode Selecting Software 20690 dselects a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systemsexplained in this specification of which the sequence is explainedhereinafter. Mode Activating Software 20690 e activates a certain amountor all modes, functions, and/or systems selected by the Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d of which the sequence is explained hereinafter. ModeImplementation Repeater 20690 f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b which reactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, Mode Activating Software 20690 e of whichthe sequence is explained hereinafter.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode List Displaying Software20690 c . CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690 c, displays a list of a certain amount or all modes,functions, and/or systems described in this specification on LCD 201(FIG. 1).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Selecting Software 20690d . The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemidentifying one of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of ModeSelecting Software 20690 d, interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Activating Software20690 e . CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690 e, activates the mode, function, or, system selected inS2 described hereinbefore. CPU 211 thereafter implements the activatedmode, function, or system as described in the relevant section of thisspecification.

This paragraph illustrates the sequence of Mode Implementation Repeater20690 f . The user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system(S1). Once the activation of the selected mode, function, or systemdescribed hereinbefore is completed, and if the input signal indicatesto repeat the process to activate another mode, function, or system(S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690 f, executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b , whichreactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c , Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d , and Mode Activating Software 20690 e to activate thesecond mode, function, or system while the first mode, function, orsystem is implemented by utilizing the method of so-called ‘timesharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690 c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690 d, and Mode Activating Software 20690 e can be repeatedlyexecuted until all modes, function, and systems displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes, functions,and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explained in S2 soindicates.

As another embodiment, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b, Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690 c, Mode Selecting Software 20690 d, ModeActivating Software 20690 e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690 fdescribed hereinbefore may be integrated into one software program,Multiple Mode Implementer 20690 b. CPU 211 (FIG. 1), first of all,displays a list of a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/orsystems described in this specification on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Next,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system identifyingone of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD 201 (S2),and CPU 211 interprets the input signal and selects the correspondingmode, function, or system (S3). CPU 211 activates the mode, function, orsystem selected in S3, and thereafter implements the activated mode,function, or system as described in the relevant section of thisspecification (S4). Once the activation of the selected mode, function,or system described in S4 is completed, the user of Communication Device200 inputs an input signal by utilizing Input Device 210 or via voicerecognition system (S5). If the input signal indicates to repeat theprocess to activate another mode, function, or system (S6), CPU 211repeats the steps S1 through S4 to activate the second mode, function,or system while the first mode, function, or system is implemented byutilizing the method so-called ‘time sharing’. The steps of S1 though S4can be repeatedly executed until all modes, function, and systemsdisplayed on LCD 201 are selected and activated. The activation ofmodes, functions, and/or systems is not repeated if the input signalexplained in S5 so indicates. As another embodiment, before or at thetime one software program is activated, CPU 211 may, eitherautomatically or manually (i.e., by a signal input by the user ofCommunication Device), terminate the other software programs alreadyactivated or prohibit other software programs to be activated while onesoftware program is implemented in order to save the limited space ofRAM 206, thereby allowing only one software program implemented at atime. For the avoidance of doubt, the meaning of each term ‘mode(s)’,‘function(s)’, and ‘system(s)’ is equivalent to the others in thisspecification. Namely, the meaning of ‘mode(s)’ includes and isequivalent to that of ‘function(s)’ and ‘system(s)’, the meaning of‘function(s)’ includes and is equivalent to that of ‘mode(s)’ and‘system(s)’, and the meaning of ‘system(s)’ includes and is equivalentto that of ‘mode(s)’ and ‘function(s)’. Therefore, even only mode(s) isexpressly utilized in this specification, it impliedly includesfunction(s) and/or system(s) by its definition.

<<Incorporation By Reference>>

The following paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Ser. No.10/710,600, filed 2004-07-23, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,090,402, areincorporated to this application by reference: the preamble described inparagraph [1806] (no drawings); Communication Device 200 (VoiceCommunication Mode) described in paragraphs [1807] through [1812] (FIGS.1 through 2 c); Voice Recognition System described in paragraphs [1813]through [1845] (FIGS. 3 through 19); Positioning System described inparagraphs [1846] through [1877] (FIGS. 20 a through 32 e); Auto BackupSystem described in paragraphs [1878] through [1887] (FIGS. 33 through37); Signal Amplifier described in paragraphs [1888] through [1893](FIG. 38); Audio/Video Data Capturing System described in paragraphs[1894] through [1906] (FIGS. 39 through 44 b); Digital Mirror Function(1) described in paragraphs [1907] through [1915] (FIGS. 44 c through 44e); Caller ID System described in paragraphs [1916] through [1923](FIGS. 45 through 47); Stock Purchasing Function described in paragraphs[1924] through [1933] (FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Functiondescribed in paragraphs [1934] through [1940] (FIGS. 53 a and 53 b);Call Blocking Function described in paragraphs [1941] through [1954](FIGS. 54 through 59); Online Payment Function described in paragraphs[1955] through [1964] (FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System describedin paragraphs [1965] through [1987] (FIGS. 65 through 74 a); RemoteControlling System described in paragraphs [1988] through [2006] (FIGS.75 through 85); Auto Emergency Calling System described in paragraphs[2007] through [2015] (FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function describedin paragraphs [2016] through [2100] (FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D VideoGame Function described in paragraphs [2101] through [2113] (FIGS. 136through 144); Digital Mirror Function (2) described in paragraphs [2114]through [2123] (FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2)described in paragraphs [2124] through [2132] (FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine described in paragraphs [2133]through [2175] (FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Functiondescribed in paragraphs through [2198] (FIGS. 183 through 201); VoicePrint Authentication System described in paragraphs [2199] through[2209] (FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2210] through [2222] (FIGS. 212 through 221);Auto Time Adjust Function described in paragraphs [2223] through [2227](FIGS. 222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode described in paragraphs [2228]through [2256] (FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function described inparagraphs [2257] through [2297] (FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting VideoGame Function described in paragraphs [2298] through [2314] (FIGS. 270through 283); Driving Video Game Function described in paragraphs [2315]through [2328] (FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book Updating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2329] through [2349] (FIGS. 295 through 312);Batch Address Book Updating Function—With Host described in paragraphsthrough [2371] (FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection described in paragraphs [2372] through[2376] (FIGS. 329 a through 329 c); Batch Scheduler UpdatingFunction—With Host described in paragraphs [2377] through (FIGS. 330through 350); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connectiondescribed in paragraphs [2401] through [2405] (FIGS. 351 and 352);Calculator Function described in paragraphs [2406] through [2411] (FIGS.353 through 356); Spreadsheet Function described in paragraphs [2412]through [2419] (FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2420] through [2435] (FIGS. 361 through 373);TV Remote Controller Function described in paragraphs [2436] through[2458] (FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2459] through [2483] (FIGS. 413 through 427);PDWR Sound Selecting Function described in paragraphs [2484] through[2520] (FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function described inparagraphs [2521] through (FIGS. 457 through 466); Another Embodiment OfCommunication Device 200 described in paragraphs [2538] through [2542](FIGS. 467 a through 467 d); Stereo Audio Data Output Function describedin paragraphs [2543] through [2562] (FIGS. 468 through 479); StereoVisual Data Output Function described in paragraphs [2563] through[2582] (FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple Signal Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2583] through [2655] (FIGS. 492 through 529);Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [2656]through [2689] (FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Hostdescribed in paragraphs [2690] through [2708] (FIGS. 554 through 567);CCD Bar Code Reader Function described in paragraphs [2709] through[2730] (FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Function described inparagraphs [2731] through [2808] (FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS CallingFunction described in paragraphs [2809] through [2829] (FIGS. 634through 645); Input Device described in paragraphs through [2835] (FIGS.646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Function described in paragraphs[2836] through [2871] (FIGS. 651 through 670); PC Remote DownloadingFunction described in paragraphs [2872] through [2921] (FIGS. 671through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function described in paragraphs[2922] through [2947] (FIGS. 702 through 716); Audio Playback Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2948] through [2972] (FIGS. 717 through 731);Ticket Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [2973] through [3002](FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Function described inparagraphs [3003] through [3032] (FIGS. 754 through 774); Business CardFunction described in paragraphs [3033] through [3049] (FIGS. 775through 783); Game Vibrating Function described in paragraphs [3050]through [3060] (FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time Job Finding Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3061] through [3081] (FIGS. 787 through 801);Parking Lot Finding Function described in paragraphs [3082] through(FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts Upgradeable Communication Devicedescribed in paragraphs [3122] through [3147] (FIGS. 833 a through 833x); On Demand TV Function described in paragraphs [3148] through [3178](FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TV Function described inparagraphs [3179] through [3213] (FIGS. 856 through 882); DisplayControlling Function described in paragraphs [3214] through [3231](FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple Party Communicating Function describedin paragraphs [3232] through [3265] (FIGS. 894 a through 917); DisplayBrightness Controlling Function described in paragraphs [3266] through[3275] (FIGS. 918 through 923); Multiple Party Pin-pointing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3276] through [3323] (FIGS. 924 through 9500;Digital Camera Function described in paragraphs [3324] through [3351](FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone Number Linking Function described inparagraphs [3352] through [3375] (FIGS. 968 a through 983); MultipleWindow Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3376] through [3394](FIGS. 984 through 995); Mouse Pointer Displaying Function described inparagraphs [3395] through [3432] (FIGS. 996 through 1021); House ItemPin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [3433] through [3592](FIGS. 1022 through 1152); Membership Administrating Function describedin paragraphs [3593] through [3635] (FIGS. 1153 through 1188); KeywordSearch Timer Recording Function described in paragraphs [3636] through[3727] (FIGS. 1189 through 1254); Weather Forecast Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3728] through [3769] (FIGS. 1255 through 1288);Multiple Language Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3770]through [3827] (FIGS. 1289 through 1331); Caller's InformationDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3828] through (FIGS. 1332through 1375); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByPhone) described in paragraphs [3881] through [3921] (FIGS. 1394 through1415); Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (By Web)described in paragraphs [3922] through [3962] (FIGS. 1416 through 1437);Shortcut Icon Displaying Function described in paragraphs [3963] through[3990] (FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task Tray Icon Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3991] through [4013] (FIGS. 1456 through 1470);Multiple Channel Processing Function described in paragraphs [4014]through [4061] (FIGS. 1471 through 1498); Solar Battery ChargingFunction described in paragraphs [4062] through [4075] (FIGS. 1499through 1509); OS Updating Function described in paragraphs [4076]through [4143] (FIGS. 1510 through 1575); Device Managing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4144] through [4161] (FIGS. 1576 through 1587);Automobile Controlling Function described in paragraphs [4162] through[4210] (FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Function described in paragraphs[4211] through [4246] (FIGS. 1628 through 1652); Multiple ModeImplementing Function described in paragraphs [4248] through [4255](FIGS. 395 through 400); Multiple Software Download Function describedin paragraphs [4256] through [4265] (FIGS. 401 through 407); SelectedSoftware Distributing Function described in paragraphs [4266] through[4285] (FIGS. 1376 through 1393 d); Multiple Software Download And ModeImplementation Function described in paragraphs [4286] through [4293](FIGS. 408 through 412); and the last sentence described in paragraph[4295] (no drawings).

1. A communication device comprising: a microphone; a speaker; an inputdevice; a display; a camera; an antenna; a voice communicatingimplementer which implements voice communication by utilizing saidmicrophone and said speaker; a sound caller ID implementer which outputsa specific sound from said speaker which corresponds to the caller ofincoming call; an auto time adjusting implementer which automaticallyadjusts the clock of said communication device in accordance with awireless signal received by said antenna; a calculation implementerwhich implements mathematical calculation by utilizing digits input viasaid input device; a word processing implementer which includes a boldformatting implementer, an italic formatting implementer, and/or a fontformatting implementer, wherein said bold formatting implementer changesalphanumeric data to bold, said italic formatting implementer changesalphanumeric data to italic, and said font formatting implementerchanges alphanumeric data to a selected font; a stereo audio data outputimplementer which processes stereo audio data to be output in a stereofashion; a digital camera implementer, wherein the output from saidcamera is stored in said communication device with the image qualityidentified by the user in advance to said output; a multiple languagedisplaying implementer, wherein a specific language is selected from aplurality of languages, where the user interface of said communicationdevice is displayed with said specific language; a caller's informationdisplaying implementer which displays a personal information regardingthe caller of incoming call; an icon software implementer, wherein thesoftware program indicated by an icon selected via said input device isexecuted; a voice recognition implementer, wherein said communicationdevice is operated in accordance with the audio data retrieved via saidmicrophone; an email implementer which produces an email in response touser input via said input device and transfers said email via saidantenna; a video phone implementer which implements audiovisualcommunication by utilizing said microphone, said speaker, and saidcamera; a navigation implementer which displays rout from a firstgeographic location to a second geographic location; an audiovisualplayback implementer which processes audiovisual data to be output fromsaid communication device; and a simultaneous implementer which isoperable to implement two or more of the following simultaneously: saidvoice communicating implementer, said sound caller ID implementer, saidauto time adjusting implementer, said calculation implementer, said wordprocessing implementer, said stereo audio data output implementer, saiddigital camera implementer, said multiple language displayingimplementer, said caller's information displaying implementer, said iconsoftware implementer, said voice recognition implementer, said emailimplementer, said video phone implementer, said navigation implementer,and said audiovisual playback implementer.
 2. The communication deviceof claim 1, wherein said communication device is a handheld device. 3.The communication device of claim 1, wherein the output from said camerais stored in said communication device with the image quality identifiedby the user by selecting a certain quality from multiple qualityselections in advance to said output when said digital cameraimplementer is performed.
 4. The communication device of claim 1,wherein the specific sound output from said speaker when said soundcaller ID implementer is performed is the one selected by the user frommultiple sound selections in advance to receiving said incoming call. 5.The communication device of claim 1, wherein said speaker includes afirst speaker and a second speaker, and said audio data is/are outputfrom said first speaker and said second speaker when said stereo audiodata output implementer is performed.
 6. The communication device ofclaim 1, wherein said plurality of languages for said multiple languagedisplaying implementer includes English.
 7. A communication devicecomprising: a microphone; a speaker; an input device; a display; acamera; an antenna; a voice communicating implementer which implementsvoice communication by utilizing said microphone and said speaker; asound caller ID implementer which outputs a specific sound from saidspeaker which corresponds to the caller of incoming call; an auto timeadjusting implementer which automatically adjusts the clock of saidcommunication device in accordance with a wireless signal received bysaid antenna; a calculation implementer which implements mathematicalcalculation by utilizing digits input via said input device; a wordprocessing implementer which includes a bold formatting implementer, anitalic formatting implementer, and/or a font formatting implementer,wherein said bold formatting implementer changes alphanumeric data tobold, said italic formatting implementer changes alphanumeric data toitalic, and said font formatting implementer changes alphanumeric datato a selected font; a stereo audio data output implementer whichprocesses stereo audio data to be output in a stereo fashion; a digitalcamera implementer, wherein the output from said camera is stored insaid communication device with the image quality identified by the userin advance to said output; a multiple language displaying implementer,wherein a specific language is selected from a plurality of languages,where the user interface of said communication device is displayed withsaid specific language; a caller's information displaying implementerwhich displays a personal information regarding the caller of incomingcall; an icon software implementer, wherein the software programindicated by an icon selected via said input device is executed; a voicerecognition implementer, wherein said communication device is operatedin accordance with the audio data retrieved via said microphone; anemail implementer which produces an email in response to user input viasaid input device and transfers said email via said antenna; a videophone implementer which implements audiovisual communication byutilizing said microphone, said speaker, and said camera; a navigationimplementer which displays rout from a first geographic location to asecond geographic location; an emergency call current locationidentifying implementer, wherein the current location is identified whenan emergency call is made from said communication device; and asimultaneous implementer which is operable to implement two or more ofthe following simultaneously: said voice communicating implementer, saidsound caller ID implementer, said auto time adjusting implementer, saidcalculation implementer, said word processing implementer, said stereoaudio data output implementer, said digital camera implementer, saidmultiple language displaying implementer, said caller's informationdisplaying implementer, said icon software implementer, said voicerecognition implementer, said email implementer, said video phoneimplementer, said navigation implementer, and said emergency callcurrent location identifying implementer.
 8. The communication device ofclaim 7, wherein said communication device is a handheld device.
 9. Thecommunication device of claim 7, wherein the output from said camera isstored in said communication device with the image quality identified bythe user by selecting a certain quality from multiple quality selectionsin advance to said output when said digital camera implementer isperformed.
 10. The communication device of claim 7, wherein the specificsound output from said speaker when said sound caller ID implementer isperformed is the one selected by the user from multiple sound selectionsin advance to receiving said incoming call.
 11. The communication deviceof claim 7, wherein said speaker includes a first speaker and a secondspeaker, and said audio data is/are output from said first speaker andsaid second speaker when said stereo audio data output implementer isperformed.
 12. The communication device of claim 7, wherein saidplurality of languages for said multiple language displaying implementerincludes English.
 13. A system comprising: a communication devicecomprising a microphone, a speaker, an input device, a display, acamera, and an antenna; a voice communicating implementer whichimplements voice communication by utilizing said microphone and saidspeaker; a sound caller ID implementer which outputs a specific soundfrom said speaker which corresponds to the caller of incoming call; anauto time adjusting implementer which automatically adjusts the clock ofsaid communication device in accordance with a wireless signal receivedby said antenna; a calculation implementer which implements mathematicalcalculation by utilizing digits input via said input device; a wordprocessing implementer which includes a bold formatting implementer, anitalic formatting implementer, and/or a font formatting implementer,wherein said bold formatting implementer changes alphanumeric data tobold, said italic formatting implementer changes alphanumeric data toitalic, and said font formatting implementer changes alphanumeric datato a selected font; a stereo audio data output implementer whichprocesses stereo audio data to be output in a stereo fashion; a digitalcamera implementer, wherein the output from said camera is stored insaid communication device with the image quality identified by the userin advance to said output; a multiple language displaying implementer,wherein a specific language is selected from a plurality of languages,where the user interface of said communication device is displayed withsaid specific language; a caller's information displaying implementerwhich displays a personal information regarding the caller of incomingcall; an icon software implementer, wherein the software programindicated by an icon selected via said input device is executed; a voicerecognition implementer, wherein said communication device is operatedin accordance with the audio data retrieved via said microphone; anemail implementer which produces an email in response to user input viasaid input device and transfers said email via said antenna; a videophone implementer which implements audiovisual communication byutilizing said microphone, said speaker, and said camera; a navigationimplementer which displays rout from a first geographic location to asecond geographic location; an audiovisual playback implementer whichprocesses audiovisual data to be output from said communication device;and a simultaneous implementer which is operable to implement two ormore of the following simultaneously: said voice communicatingimplementer, said sound caller ID implementer, said auto time adjustingimplementer, said calculation implementer, said word processingimplementer, said stereo audio data output implementer, said digitalcamera implementer, said multiple language displaying implementer, saidcaller's information displaying implementer, said icon softwareimplementer, said voice recognition implementer, said email implementer,said video phone implementer, said navigation implementer, and saidaudiovisual playback implementer.
 14. The communication device of claim13, wherein said communication device is a handheld device.
 15. Thecommunication device of claim 13, wherein the output from said camera isstored in said communication device with the image quality identified bythe user by selecting a certain quality from multiple quality selectionsin advance to said output when said digital camera implementer isperformed.
 16. The communication device of claim 13, wherein thespecific sound output from said speaker when said sound caller IDimplementer is performed is the one selected by the user from multiplesound selections in advance to receiving said incoming call.
 17. Thecommunication device of claim 13, wherein said speaker includes a firstspeaker and a second speaker, and said audio data is/are output fromsaid first speaker and said second speaker when said stereo audio dataoutput implementer is performed.
 18. The communication device of claim13, wherein said plurality of languages for said multiple languagedisplaying implementer includes English.